Organising and Running Workshops

Background / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS
A Practical Guide for Trainers
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

A practical guide for trainers
Original Spanish Version Written by

Carmen Candelo R.
Gracia Ana Ortiz R.
Barbara Unger
CALI COLOMBIA 2003
1 / 204
2 / 204
HACER TALLERES

Authors:
Carmen Candelo Reina, Gracia Ana Ortiz R., Barbara Unger
A publication by:
WWF Colombia (World Wide Fund for Nature)
www.wwf.org.co
InWEnt (antes DSE Alemania)
www.inwent.org
IFOK (Institute for Organisational Communication, Germany)
www.ifok.de
Design and diagrams:
Mnica Uribe
Illustrations:
Juan Pablo Marn
First Revision (Spanish version):
Guillermo Dez
Final Revision (Spanish version):
Communications Office, WWF Colombia
Typesetting and Printing (Spanish version):
Grafiq Editores
WWF - InWEnt (DSE) - IFOK
The authors
ISBN 958-95905-4-3
WWF Colombia
Cra 35 N 4A - 25
Barrio San Fernando
Tel: + 57 2 558 25 77
Fax: + 57 2 558 25 88
info@wwf.org.co
Cali, Colombia
2003
English Translation. 2005
AG Language Services
United Kingdom.
alpha@aes2001.net
Graphical Design and Editing
Comporapid, Spain
Photographs:
Cover:
Edward Parker
WWF
Important
For information regarding the copyright of this
publication, please contact the authors or the
editors via the email addresses for their respective
organisations or via hacertalleres@wwf.org.co
Colombia / Diego M. Garcs
Inside pages:
WWF
Colombia / Carmen Candelo,
WWF
Colombia / Andrs Trujillo,
WWF
Colombia / Faizuly Cern,
WWF
Colombia / Luis Fernando Gmez.
Contents / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

Contents
1. Background
1.1. About the organisations
WWF Colombia
1.1.2. DSE
1.1.3. IFOK
1.2. About the authors
1.1.1.
7
8
8
2. Introduction
2.1. What is ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS?
2.2. What is the focus?
2.3. Who is it aimed at?
2.4. How do I use this manual?
10
2.5. Where does the focus come from?
10
2.6. What does it contain?
11
3. Conceptual framework
3.1. Learning
13
3.2. Communication
19
3.3. Participation
22
3.4. Managing Time
27
4. The training workshop

4.1. Types of training events
31
4.2. Creating the training workshop
34
5. Organising a training workshop

5.1. The work plan
41
5.2. Selecting and contracting the training team
41
5.3. Setting the workshop dates
42
5.4. Inviting the participants
42
5.5. Budget
43
5.6. The workshop venue
44
5.7. Materials
48
3 / 204
4 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Contents

5.8. The day before the workshop
49
5.9. Advice on organisation
51
5.10. Templates
52
to help with organisation
Example of a work plan for organising a workshop
52
Format of workshop venue requirements list
53
Format of materials list required for running a visual

participative workshop
54
Example of a workshop agenda
55
Template of invitation or announcement
59
Example of invitation or announcement
60
Template confirmation
63
Template of a preliminary survey
64
Example of preliminary survey
65
Budgeting Form
68
Directory Template
69
6. Implementing the workshop

6.1. The workshop induction
71
6.2. The running order of the days
74
6.3. The workshop closing session
76
6.4. Workshop handouts
78
6.5. The photographic record
78
6.6. Recommendations for the implementation of the workshop
81
7. The training team

7.1. Introduction
83
7.2. Roles within a training team
83
7.3. Composition of the team
83
7.4. Performance of the training team
84
7.5. The workshop timetable
86
7.6. The coordinator
87
7.7. The moderator
90
7.8. The trainer
94
7.9. The support people
97
8. The Tool box

8.1. Tools for Participation
101
8.2. Tools for visualisation
107
Cards
112
Flipchart
112
Contents / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

8.3.
Acetates
113
Displays
114
Slides
114
Notes or prompts
115
Multi-media presentation
115
Video
116
Computer presentation
116
Field trip or site visit
117
Tools for training

8.3.1. Participants to introduce themselves
118
Standard introduction
121
The interview
122
The drawing
123
Through illustrations
124
The shield
125
My life story
126
The silhouette
127
The ball of string
128
The classified ad
129
Wanted posters
130
8.3.2.
Making up pairs and organising groups
Famous couples
131
The animal chorus
132
Proverbs and sayings
133
Two ends of a thread
134
The jigsaw puzzle
135
8.3.3.
Gathering together ideas or opinions
The selection of options
136
The brainstorming session
137
The poll by cards
138
Whispered or simultaneous dialogues
139
Group rotation
140
The fish tank
142
Phillips 66
143
8.3.4.
Making an analysis
Exchanging experiences
144
Role-play
145
The conceptual map
146
The case study
147
Simulation
148
The excursion or field trip
149
SWOT analysis
150
Venn diagrams
151
110
5 / 204
6 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Contents

Flow diagrams/charts
152
The time line
153
For and against
154
The tree for analysing problems
155
The discussion analysis table
156
8.3.5.
Planning
The table for prioritising problems
157
The declaration of commitment
158
The commitment table
159
The commitment star
160
The objectives table
161
The action plan
162
8.3.6.
Making evaluations
The daily committee
163
The moodometer
164
The evaluation chart
165
The lightening poll
166
The evaluation wheel
167
8.3.7.
Playing games and encouraging creativity
Crazy canasta
168
The (Gordian) knot
169
The wheel
170
Reading colours
171
Four flowers in one pencil stroke
172
Joining the dots
173
Lets get organised
174
The scissors game
175
The salad of proverbs
176
9. Problems
9.1. Introduction
177
9.2. Problems before starting the workshop
178
9.3. Problems during the workshop
184
9.4. Problems after the workshop
199
Dear Trainer
201
Bibliography
202
Background / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

1.
Background
understanding and support. Finally, we wish to thank

our three funders DSE, WWF and IFOK and especially
Alan Walsch, Mary Lou Higgins, Gabriela Grau and Hans-
he
ORGANISING
AND
RUNNING
WORKSHOPS manual came about from a need
Peter Meister for their commitment to publishing the

manual that we have dreamed of for so long.
identified by the people involved in the joint
training programme organised by DSE and the Colombian
We would like to hear about your experiences and
organisation ECOFONDO between 1997 and 2001. While
welcome suggestions you may have for improving this
running workshops for trainers, participants often
manual. You can contact us by email at:
requested books in Spanish that would help them put
hacertallares@wwf.org.co
what they had learned into practice. They were looking

for material that not only dealt with the in-depth
perspective and methodology of participative workshops,
1.1.
About the organisations
but also helped them remember the stages of preparation,

implementation and follow up. Therefore, DSE, WWF
and IFOK decided to respond to these concerns in this
manual.
We envisage this manual to be a practical one. You can
choose where you start reading, which chapters to select
and which materials to use depending on the needs of
your workshop.
We provide you with a focus on participatory workshops,
based on real life needs and mutual learning.
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS is based
on the experience that the three of us have had in running
workshops. The workshops we set up in Colombia,
which we mentioned previously, were particularly
important. We would like to thank our colleagues and
friends who helped us in the conception and writing of
1.1.1 WWF
Colombia
The World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF) Colombia
directs its efforts towards the conservation of ecosystems
and the sustainable management of their biodiversity
through a series of projects and strategies. WWF
Colombia believes that to effectively meet these aims in
the long term, it is fundamental to strengthen the abilities
of the key players in Colombian society, such as
community, indigenous, non-governmental and
governmental organisations. With this in mind, a process
of training and education covering different subject areas
is undertaken. The content and methodology for this
work have been designed and adapted to meet the
particular needs and characteristics of the groups
concerned, taking into account that training and
education serve to sow a seed of comitment in the human
spirit for better surroundings and a living planet
www.wwf.org.co
this manual. Many thanks also go to the training

workshop participants. We particularly wish to thank:
1.1.2. DSE
Yanire Becerra, Vctor Orozco, Ricardo Rodrguez and
The German Foundation for International Development
Diego Garca for their comments on the first draft of the
(DSE) is an organisation that promotes dialogue in the
manual; Fernando Caicedo for coming up with some of
political arena of development and the professional
the ideas presented in the caricatures; the proof-readers,
training and improvement for technical and management
Uwe Krappitz and Julio Mario Fernndez, for their
personnel in developing countries and countries in
recommendations and our families, for their
transition. Similarly, within the German technical and
7 / 204
8 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Background

cultural cooperation, the Foundation prepares teams of

technicians and their families for their stay in a developing
country. Most of the Foundations' programmes are
financed by the Ministry of Economic and Development
Cooperation.
The main areas of work for the DSE are education,
science and documentation; social and economic
development; promoting public administration;
Carmen Candelo, Barbara Unger, Ana Gracia Ortiz Ruiz
encouraging industrial and crafts professions; food and

agriculture; public health and journalism. In early 2003,
DSE merged with CDG and is currently called InWEnt
and setting up projects, managing environmental conflicts
www.inwent.org
and participatory methodologies for planning and

environmental management. As an officer at the WWF
1.1.3. IFOK
Colombia programme for four years, she coordinated
The Institut fr Organisationskommunikation GmbH
the Choc Ecoregional Programme and at the time of
(Institute for communication in organisations) is a private
writing this manual she coordinates the Strengthening
think-tank and consultancy that supports councils,
Civil Society project. She lives in Cali, Colombia.
government, trade associations, businesses and other

private and public organisations. IFOK facilitates
dialogue, sets up communication and cooperation
processes for different individuals or organisations who
wish to reach a joint objective, which requires an effective
communication and organisation between the parties
involved. IFOK also identifies and works on specific
issues that may impact the well-being of society, seeking
mutually agreeable options www.ifok.de
1.2.
About the authors
Carmen Candelo Reina (born 1961), marketer, food

technologist and studying for her masters degree in
sustainable development and agricultural systems. She
has been responsible for training and instruction
processes with organisations including the Association
for Rural Development (Asociacin para el Desarrollo
Campesino), the Javeriana University, the Ecofondo
Corporation, working on subjects such as identifying
Gracia Ana Ortiz Ruiz (born 1965), a graduate in business studies and political science, her work has been
dedicated to training in different universities and private
organisations and in particular training trainers. As an officer
at IFOK, she focuses on contributing to building and
strengthening networks and to exchanging experiences
between organisations, work which is promoted by various
German government departments. She lives in Frankfurt
am Main, Germany.
Barbara Unger (born 1968), a graduate in political science,
specialising in international development, she has designed
and run training programmes covering human rights,
resolving conflict and environmental management aimed
at Latin American, Asian and African audiences. At the
time of writing this manual she is a consultant to NGO's
(non-governmental organisations) and the German Foreign
Ministry focusing on resolving conflict, and she facilitates
participatory workshop and other events. She lives in
Berlin, Germany.
Introduction / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

2.
Introduction
2.1.
What is ORGANISING AND

RUNNING WORKSHOPS?
This manual is a compilation of concepts and tools
Attention to needs:
for planning, organising, putting into practice and
We apply what we have learned more easily, if what
following up for a training workshop, putting aside
we take on board in a workshop relates to the
the actual workshop content or specific context.
problems that are of interest to us.
The manual summarises the important steps in simple
Participation:
task lists and easy definitions to set up a training
Any training process which involves participation
workshop in a swift, efficient and comprehensive
increases individual motivation and capacity to learn;
way. It is our intention therefore, to help trainers in
so the training is more effective if we have the
their search for the best possible combination of what
opportunity to learn through our actions.
the participants need and what they, the trainers,

wish to convey.
Visualisation:
Creating visual examples of proposals, discussions
and agreements that come up in a workshop, makes
it easier to participate and focus on fulfilling needs.
workshop
manual is focussed on training adults. The main
objectives came
characteristic of the training workshop is to transfer
from knowledge
knowledge and techniques to the participants so that
and awareness of
the participants are able to put them into practice.
the participants'
ti
ipa on
rt
Pa ic
The
e
Att nt
t
ion o
The ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS
eds
What is the focus?
on
needs; participation,
Learning is a way of initiating these changes and it is
most
more effective if we learn in an all-encompassing
condition for ensuring
way. Therefore, as the trainer, you look for specific
that learning does indeed
tools to facilitate the learning process. Training is
take place; and visualisation is the means
not a one-way street, but a mutual learning process
by which it is possible.
ati
as a process, is the
Human beings instinctively look for positive changes.
al
isu is
important
ne
2.2.
involving feedback - nobody knows everything, but

everyone knows something and together we know
Who is it aimed at?
a great deal.
2.3.
The process, methodology and tools we present are
The manual is aimed at trainers, namely:
based on three main axes:
The people who are responsible for the
9 / 204
10 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Introduction

organisation and general coordination of the
lists of tasks and detailed descriptions of functions,
workshop: the coordinators.
steps and tools. In addition, we offer a selection of

material to suit different workshop situations.
The people who are responsible for leading and

introducing a fresh perspective into the material
The layout of ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS
which deals with the workshop content: the
makes it easy to photocopy sections. It also allows
moderator
you to add notes or data from other sources in such

a way that you can adapt your manual to suit your
The people responsible for subject content: the
individual needs and personal taste.
trainers.
It is particularly aimed at people who have taken
2.5.
Where does the focus come from?
part in participatory workshops, and who now have

the role of workshop trainer. We also hope that the
Nowadays, the term training workshop is used for
experienced trainers might benefit from the manual.
training events that combine the participants'
For those who are just entering this field of work,
experiences and needs with the trainers' aims.
we hope this manual will be a good working tool.

The tools and concepts introduced in this manual
came from the methodology developed by the
2.4.
How do I use the manual?
promoters of popular education in Latin American

countries and in METAPLAN , developed by a
This manual helps you gain a clear picture of the
German team of consultants in the late 1970's.
learning and methodological principles of a

workshop. It guides you through the necessary steps
Many organisations have promoted a participatory
and the important features of successful training.
and visual learning focus in their countless training

events for people from particular cultural
In line with your level of knowledge and experience,
backgrounds and in very diverse areas. Trainers from
the format allows the reader to dip into what ever
different countries and with different disciplines have
chapter is of interest. So, for example, if you are a
combined their personal experiences and have
coordinator, you can begin reading the chapters about
adapted the tools to their needs, continuously fine-
the workshop, whilst a moderator may start looking
tuning them. So now, as you can see from the selected
at the chapter about moderating, to gain an exact
bibliography, there is a good deal of specific
definition of their roles.
knowledge about designing and implementing a

training workshop. We have made the most of these
This manual does not intend to provide the definitive
sources and our own experience to write this manual.
guide to workshops and you will always adapt the

suggestions and recommendations to your own
What does it contain?
particular needs.
2.6.
For the manual to be as useful as possible, it contains
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS begins
Introduction / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

with the chapter The basics/
Conceptual framework, which
Dear reader,
includes elements of learning

theory, communication, participa-
It is impor tant that as
tion and time

management
that supports
the
proposed
theory of teaching.
In the chapter The
training workshop, we
trainers we have an open and

tolerant attitude and that we are conscious
of the environment we are working in. Gender
balance and equality in other issues are very
important for the well-being within a group.
first present a number of

types of training events and their
Learning is a sensitive and complex process that
most relevant characteristics; then
takes time and can be unwelcome because learning
we concentrate on the training

workshop: the initial idea from
which the workshop came about
means adding to and/or replacing our old ideas,

habits and points of view with new ones. This is
and all the stages to develop the
why, as trainers, we need to behave in an ethical
event until the design is complete.
way and with tact and respect towards our
The following chapter Organising
a training workshop, is dedicated
participants.
to the description of the different

tasks that need to be carried out and
decisions that need to be made so
that the workshop can be run.
Running the workshop provides

a step-by-step guide of what happens in the training
Another element you will find in most
process and a guide to managing and overcoming
of the chapters in this manual is a box
the daily pitfalls and needs of the event and the tasks
with this symbol which is where we
still to be done once the workshop has been run. In
summarise the key points that you should bear in
the chapter The training team, we discuss in detail
mind when organising and running a training
who makes up the team, what skills they need to
workshop.
have and the responsibilities they need to take on to

make the training possible. After that, we present
In some chapters on the other hand, we include a
The toolbox for use during the training. It
final section called Recommendations... in which
concludes with the chapter Problems, which
we provide some suggestions about how to
provides a detailed description of the main obstacles
procede when you come to decision-making or
that can arise at different stages of the training (before,
what action to take with the different processes of
during and after) and proposed solutions.
the workshop.
11 / 204
12 / 204
Conceptual Framework / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

3.
Conceptual framework
How learning works
information we have already acquired; and so we
How communication works
are building up and enriching our personal
What is meant by participation and how it is
experiences. Every time we have to make a decision
achieved
we refer back to these experiences, which allow us
How to manage time.
to quickly react and undertake different activities.
o be a good trainer, we believe it is important to
we become aware of new information, we compare
have a basic idea and understanding of:
it with what we already have in our memories and

we connect and categorise it with the other
This allows us to learn, react quickly and improve

Knowing more about these points will help you to
how we perform our skills.
design and run a training workshop.

For example, when we learn to drive a car we make
a lot of mistakes: we forget to use the clutch to change
3.1.
Learning
gear; we brake suddenly; we stall the vehicle when

we brake at a red traffic light if we have not put our
The ultimate aim of all training is that people learn
foot on the clutch, etc. Once we know how to drive,
something. The subject of learning is of interest to a
when we are faced with a red traffic light, we
number of different disciplines such as medicine,
automatically brake in an appropriate way and
psychology, sociology and pedagogy (the science of
ultimately put our foot on the clutch without thinking.
teaching). We offer some basic elements of how
Our memory quickly links information red traffic
learning works and how to make the most of this

knowledge to strengthen your teaching practice.
light with brake and step on the clutch, because if

we do not we will stall the car.
3.1.1. How
Adults have a lot of information and previous
do we learn?
Learning means acquiring information, understanding
experiences, which in a learning process we add to
it, memorising it and putting it into practice. We are
and replace with new information. Learning is indeed
constantly gathering information from our
this process of adding to or putting aside images
surroundings via our five senses, subconsciously or
already memorised and replacing them with new
otherwise. In our memory we store the information
ones. It is a somewhat difficult process of change.
in groups of images and associations which serve as
The level of resistance depends on the timescale
reference points with the world around us. When
between the existing and the new information.
13 / 204
14 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Conceptual Framework

Conscious and unconscious

information
This allows us to retain and gather

information for about 45 minutes.
The data passes from the short-
Receptive or
sensory memory
term memory to the long-term

memory via a filter that converts
First filter
Short-term memory or
working memory
chemical reaction, into proteins:

this is how information is stored
Second filter
Long-term memory
Archive
(Hipocampus)
the information, by means of a
in the long-term memory.

One of the consequences of this
process is that after 45 minutes the
short-term memory is swamped and,
3.1.2. The
biological process of learning
therefore, our capacity to take in more information
Our memory is made up of three parts: reception,
reaches its limit, so it needs a rest in order to create
short-term and long-term. Learning as a biological
space once again. This is why we recommend that
process is a chemical reaction in our brain. When we
during a learning session there are breaks of about
receive new information we first assess it for a few
10 minutes every three-quarters of an hour. All this
minutes by means of electrical signals in our receptive
effort and the chemical reactions involved in learning
memory. From here it goes through a very subjective
burn up a lot of energy. This is why it is difficult for
selection process via a filter to the short-term memory.
us to learn while experiencing low energy levels; for
The perception of images
The perception of sounds
Human beings receive images through the eyes retina;

the images pass to the brain, via the optic nerve (1)
and on to the visual cortex (2). The information
reaches the area of association (3) and there
it is compared with what is stored in the frontal (4)
and temporal (5) lobes: this is how we
interpret what we see.
Human beings receive sounds (hear) via the ear (1)

and from there the sounds pass to the brain,
to the auditory cortex (2). The sounds received
pass to the area of association (3) and there they are
compared with information stored in the frontal (4)
and temporal (5) lobes: this is how we
interpret what we hear.

Memories in perception
and learning
Procedural
Memory
Sensorial Memory
Stores skills learned

through practice,
like riding a bicycle.
(iconic and echoic

memories)
Retains stimuli such as
images or sounds for a
few seconds.
Short-term/
working Memory
Receives sensory
data and can retain
it and interpret
or discard it.
Consolidation
The information passes
from the short-term
memory to the
Hipocampus (the
temporal lobe)
Long-term
Memory
Is where storage and
retrieval of memories
take place and has three
basic forms:
Semantic
Memory
Deals with words,
language, facts
and their
meanings.
Episodic
Memory
Registers specific
actions and experiences
such as holidays
(memories).
example, when we have slept badly or briefly. We
3.1.3. How
to support learning for adults
also learn less after meals, because at that time we
As we mentioned previously, learning is a process of
need our energy for the chemical process required
change that causes a certain degree of resistance. The
for digestion.
resistance of an adult faced with change is reduced

and is overcome when the learning is connected with
It is not known exactly why certain information
current personal or organisational needs. It is
manages to pass from the short-term to the long-
important for the trainee to understand the need, show
term memory and other information does not. One
a personal interest and see the benefits. We overcome
conclusion is that the information which reaches the
resistance to change when we sense the immediate
long-term memory is generally information of personal
possibility of putting what we have learned into
interest or an emotional nature and that this
practice in our personal or in our professional lives.
information is connected to knowledge and
For the trainers, this means that a training objective
experience or to a specific situation or information
based on the current needs of the participants
which has been repeated a number of times.
guarantees success.
15 / 204
16 / 204

To support the process of change, it is also necessary
This is why it is important for the trainer to set
to use tools that allow the participants to incorporate
exercises which put the learning material into practice
it into the activities in the training and to acquire
and in which everyone takes part; so the participants
personal experiences. Some studies have shown that
are not simply objects of the process but subjects
we retain:
who contribute their experiences and have their own

interests at heart. This is how they effectively build
on their abilities and skills and enhance their personal
100%
of
repeated
actions
90%
of what
we do
development.
Another factor to bear in mind is the cognitive and
emotional facets to learning. Our brain is divided into
two parts: the left side is responsible for logic,
language, numbers, analysis, thinking step by step
and paying attention to detail; and the right side is
responsible for emotions, the visual, the intuitive,
70%
fantasy, what puts aside detail and allows for
of what
we say
contradictions, the side which creates ideas. The left

side is the cognitive part of the brain and the right
the emotional part.
65%
of what
we write
50%
of what we
see and hear
Our brain
Left Side
Right Side
Logic
Intuition
30%
Analysis
Emotions
of what
we see
Attention
to detail
Fantasy
Language
Images
20%
of what
we hear
Visual Workshop
10%
Most people have one side more developed than the
of what
we read
other, usually the left side because traditional learning

stimulates this side of the brain more. As a trainer,
you need to bear in mind each side and present

Biorhythm
The circadian cycle
Noon
information in such a way that it simultaneously
The level begins to increase at about 05.00 am and
stimulates them both; for example, complement text
reaches its peak at about 10.00 am; it remains stable
with drawings or diagrams and develop your
until about midday, when it begins to slowly decline
explanations to include images that may help with
until about six in the evening. At which point, it
the interpretation and comprehension of your
reaches a slight peak and once again decreases to its
message.
lowest point between one and three in the morning

and then the cycle begins again. That is why at the
We also recommend using activities that force the
planning stage, it is better to programme the sessions
participants to give preference to the right side of
that need the most participant concentration in the
their brains.
morning and leave group participatory exercises and

activities for the afternoon.
In addition to the above, to support adult learning,

the trainer needs to think about the atmosphere of
the training venue. This should be comfortable and
spacious, avoiding distractions such as noises, physical
or psychological obstacles. When setting the timetable,
bear in mind the human biorhythm. This is the cycle
of higher or lower activity a person has throughout
the day. It is regulated by hormonal substances that
create a greater or lesser capacity for concentration
and physical or mental productivity.
The main hormone that regulates the circadian (24hour) cycle responsible for the biorhythm is cortisol.
17 / 204
18 / 204

Heres how you make

learning easier
Let the participants know what the objective
of the training is. If they know the aims, they
Summarise and revise the content, paying

attention to the needs of the participants.
can position themselves in the process and

actively participate in it.
Allow the participants time to discuss what

and how they wish to learn, particularly with
Limit the amount of information given at one
regards the content learning material offered
time. As we mentioned earlier, we can only
during the training. If you dont allow this
hold a certain amount of information in our
freedom, people will have greater resistance
short-term memory.
to change and will not accept new

information.
Allow time for reflection and pace the sessions

to suit the participants abilities.
Think of the training as a multidirectional

process. The participants learn from the
Combine new infor mation with the
trainers, but the trainers also learn from the
participants experiences. Ideally, new
participants experiences and the participants
information should contain elements for
learn from each other. A trainer must not
problem solving.
adopt the attitude of knowing it all. Nobody
Alternate activities, for example, follow the
knows everything, and everyday we learn
presenting with a group exercise using
something new if we have an open mind.
different visual aids, etc.
Put what has been lear ned during the
Bear in mind the level of training the
workshop into practice in such a way that
participants have already had and adapt
the participants can relate to the concepts
your teaching starting point to their abilities.
and as a result will show more interest.
If you demand something outside of their

ability range, your trainees will become
Understand that a workshop is a moment in
disillusioned and de-motivated. The goal of
the learning process. The follow-through and
the workshop needs to be met by the
support to apply the material lear ned
participants with their own resources.
complement a true teaching process.

3.2.
Communication
Example
Two people are in a car; the passenger says to the
As with learning, communication is a part of our day-
driver:
The traffic light
is green!
to-day existence. We are continually exchanging

messages with others and with our surroundings.
Communication is passing on information, concepts,
feelings and instructions. Even though we might not
This message is simultaneously interpreted by the
say anything, we are nevertheless communicating.
speaker in four possible ways, as though he/she had
Indeed, by not saying anything at all, we are
four ears:
communicating a message; furthermore, we send
The content ear: With this ear we can hear the content
messages through our body language.
of the message - what has literally been said. In the

The subject of communication is a complex one. Here,
example, this is The traffic light is green.
we can only give you a small, very general insight

into some of the aspects of communication. We will
The suggestion ear: With this ear we can hear what
describe Schulz von Thuns communication model
the speaker would like us to do. In the example,
and we will look at body language our gestures,

postures and expressions.
accelerate, so that you can get passed the traffic light

before it turns red!.
3.2.1. Schulz
The personal revelation ear: With this ear we hear
von Thuns Model
All messages need a person who sends out the
what the speaker reveals about him or herself. In the
message (the sender or speaker) and a person who
example, Im in a hurry!.
receives that message (the recipient). Fried-mann

Schulz von Thuns model, which we will explain in
The personal relationship ear: With this ear, we can
the following example, is based on the fact that each
hear what the speaker feels about the relationship
message can be heard as if we had four different
and the reliance there is on the recipient. In the
ears.
example, You need me to help you drive.
Schulz von Thuns Four

Ears Model
What is
the content?
What does this

reveal about oneself?
The content
ear
The personal
revelation ear
What does he
think of me?
The personal
relationship ear
What does he
want me to do?
The personal
revelation ear
19 / 204
20 / 204

A= Speaker
B= Recipient
Our first means of communication as

What B has
interpreted
human beings is body language; crying,

smiling and gestures are our unique way
of expressing ourselves for the first
months of our lives; a normal adult cannot
What A wanted
B to understand
Message
help but notice these calls. When we learn

to speak, our body language remains
intact: we retain gestures, movements and
What B
could also have
understood
facial expressions and we use them

alongside the spoken word. As adults,
however, in our daily contact with others,
we are slowly losing the ability to interpret
these messages and signals that other
The messages that are transmitted are not always clear
adults are transmitting through their body and which
and, therefore, it is difficult to interpret them. The
accompany verbal messages, attaching important
interpretation very much depends on the frame of
information to them.
mind of the recipient. The same message can be

interpreted in different ways. Some conflicts and
It is important for you as a trainer to be aware of the
misunderstandings often arise when the recipient has
existence of body language and its importance both
heard the message with one of the ears that the
for giving and receiving information: facial expressions
speaker didnt in fact wish to activate. The further
show feelings; posture indicates a particular stance
away the message understood by the recipient is from
or emotional state; and gestures speak for themselves
what the speaker wanted to say, the greater are the
if only to emphasise what is being said. By paying
misunderstandings and the impossibility of two-way
attention to your surroundings therefore, you will
communication.
know how to interpret these types of signals that

participants might direct to each other and to you.
This is why members of a training team define which
For example, if someone is sitting with their upper
ear they wish to activate by changing their manner,
body leaning forward, this usually means they are
voice, volume and tone so the message is not
listening attentively; if they are sitting back and with
misunderstood. Equally, they must be aware of what
their arms folded, this suggests an expectant attitude.
the participants say and how they say it, so that they
can differentiate between what the participants have
Although you will certainly have your own personal
said and what they actually wanted to say.
style when you are in public, in your role as a trainer

you should bear in mind the following examples of
3.2.2.
Body language
Unspoken language, defined by facial expressions,
non-verbal messages that may help you effectively

carry out that role.
gestures and body movements, confirm, replace or

contradict the words we have spoken. To put it
another way, our body says as much as our words,
whether we like it or not.
Maintaining eye-contact with your audience shows

interest and presence; if this is missing, it encourages
distractions and de-motivation.

Joining the tips of the thumb and index finger shows
Repeatedly playing with a watch, necklaces,
that the speaker is giving information about precise,
bracelets, rings, curling your moustache or hair
thorough and specific matters.
distracts the audience.
Moving the hand in a cutting-off motion emphasises
With experience and intuition you will be able to
something very important.
add to this list and include other meanings for what

we have included here.
Hands and arms should be moved at waist level.

3.2.3. The
Make sure you are in a comfortable position, relaxed
importance of communication
for learning
and at ease. A fixed standing position with arms
Communication connects or separates people. As well
extended parallel to the rest of the body gives an
as what we have already mentioned, the tone of voice
impression of fear and rigidity.
and personal appearance are other resources which

can be maximised to make the training message
Rubbing your hands together expresses

impatience or anxiety.
Crossed arms can put a
barrier between you and your
listener or project a defiant
attitude toward the audience.
Frequently touching your
face, scratching your head,
rubbing your ear or chin shows
insecurity and lack of confidence.
effective and productive. A particular

intonation can ensure that the
message is in fact received;
another intonation can mean
that the focus of attention is
on the speakers manner,
thus diverting attention
away from the message. For
example, if I say Now we
will do the most important
exercise in the workshop but
I say it with an inappropriate
tone, the participants may interpret
the sentence very differently from what is
Hands in trouser pockets with arms close to the
literally said and understand it to be irony or sarcasm.
body, give the impression that the speaker has

something to hide.
The amount of information that is given is also

important. Using a lot of words to say something does
While presenting, use the space available between
not mean you are expressing things better. On the
you and the audience; if you think it is convenient,
contrary, a lengthy explanation can water down or
approach one of the participants to ask a question.
confuse the message. Many people do not go straight
Do all this with natural movements that hold peoples
to the point or address the most important issue but
attention on you and what you say.
give long descriptions and begin to explain ideas that

though they may be interesting are not related to the
Exaggerated hand or arm movements give off a
subject in question. It is possible that with carefully
sense of impatience and distract listeners.
chosen sentences you can ensure that the participants
21 / 204
22 / 204

are concentrating on the message you wish to convey,

attention to the signals you are unconsciously
before they form their own ideas.
sending out; for example, insecurities, bad

As we will mention later on in Section 8.2, you get
mood, impatience and in particular, the
your message across more effectively and it will remain
signals that will distract your audience. It is
with the recipient for longer when you use visual
worth improving your awareness of the
materials. For example, if your message is explaining
signals your participants give off, because
an exercise that has a number of steps, you should
these are reliable indicators of the level of
complement your instructions with something visual
understanding and endorsement of what you
that details each step that you have mentioned. This
are presenting to them.
provides greater clarity and retention of the procedure.

Remember that a good image helps what you
There can be as much confusion sending out messages
say to be taken seriously and, therefore, can
as with receiving them. Although many people may
have positive effects. An occasional smile to
appear to be paying attention to your message, they
accompany what you ar e saying is
do not actually understand or comprehend its meaning.
worthwhile. Sometimes, image is worth more
It is essential, therefore, that the language during the
than a thousand words.
workshop is adequate and appropriate for the cultural

background of the participants. Be careful what terms
you use, because language that is too elaborate creates
a barrier which inhibits communication between the
speaker and the recipient.
3.3.
Participation
Participation is the main training methodological axis

that we present in this manual. We recognise and
value the importance of participation as a practice, a
condition and a fundamentally necessary activity for
any kind of social development.
We will emphasise contextualised participation in a
training group. We are convinced that a person can
only apply something in the workplace when they
have actually experienced something positive and
Although the words you say are
constructive and have achieved good results with it
important, your body language is
and for themselves.
your visual presentation of your

message, because it reveals what you are
Under this remit, we discuss in this chapter the idea
really thinking and the way you feel at that
of participation: what it should be like; the dynamic
moment. It is important, therefore, to pay
of a group; how people participate and the advantages

and disadvantages of participation in a workshop. In

the chapter The tool box you will find a variety of
amount of knowledge and the way the members of
materials and activities which will help facilitate
the group gather and process useful information for
participation in your workshop.
decision making.
3.3.1. What
3.3.2. What
do we understand by participation?
form should participation take?
Participating means being part of; taking part in;
The focus of participation in a training workshop
experiencing the process; owning the information and
should be ever present, across the board and dynamic.
only then taking decisions to change reality. There
This can be achieved by using suitable and efficient
are two reasons why it is important that each person
processes, in keeping with the profile and needs of
takes part and decides on the training process.
the participants.
Functional people learn better if, as well as receiving
So that participation in a training process is a positive
data, they can also contribute their experiences and
and worthwhile experience, it should be:
points of view on a given problem and so feel that

their participation contributes to the search for a
Active: everyone contributes something to
solution.
discussions and decision-making.
Put up your hand

if you disagree.
Critical: the themes are thought about and analysed

in a constructive way and from various points of view.
Organised: complying with previously agreed rules

and format.
Creative: creating innovative ideas, pooling them

together and adding new ideas and associations.
Fair: each person has the right to participate and

Ethical Everyone has the right to identify and define
everyone involved has the same worth.
the changes that they believe to be right for their life.

That is why in any training, the participants should
Precise: defining and clarifying the terms, so that
be seen as people who can make their own decisions
consensual results are reached.
and not just as objects on which changes are imposed.

This is only achieved thr ough a structured
Legitimate: seeking agreements that everyone can
participatory process.
identify with.
The basic principal for participation within a
3.3.3. What
workshop is to make the most of the participants
Each group will develop its own dynamic, so no
potential, their experiences and knowledge of a
group will behave in exactly the same way. The
subject. To achieve this, it is important to bear in
trainer needs to consider the group as more than
mind how the group is made up; how it works; the
just the number of individuals invited.
it the group dynamic?
23 / 204
24 / 204

Someone who takes part in a workshop might initially
and consequently the way they behave in front of
feel nervous or insecure, because, on the one hand,
the group.
they are going to be confronted by, and integrated

with, other people who they do not know. On the
Common interests: once the workshop has begun
other hand, they are going to experience a process
the reactions of some towards others manifest
of which they may know something about but do
themselves, as does a willingness or resistance to
not in fact know whether it will be like that. This
agreeing and participating. It is the stage of conflicts,
state of insecurity can increase if there is a reluctance
the time to find common interests and establish

whether they can get on with each other. The
to change attitudes.
questions are linked with verifying that they

have something in common and
People go through different levels of

participation as the workshop
whether they can agree, disagree,
progresses and confidence grows.
accept or reject others opinions,
Initially, the people who make up
work out who takes decisions and
the new group take on a rather
what affects the group.
reserved and observational role. It
Recognition and evaluation of the

group itself: the participants learn to
is very important, therefore, that the

trainer encourages the integration of the
group and that he/she is aware of the people
who may distance themselves. Integration begins with
accept their roles and individual positions for

the benefit of all, they help the group adjust and
the first activities when the workshop begins.
there is evidence of familiarity and support.
The group dynamic, among other things, depends
Collective involvement: when a group becomes a
on the size, the personal and professional profiles,
real working team, the participants, as a group,
where individuals come from, similarities and
assume responsibility for the tasks, they voluntarily
differences, the length of the workshop, the venue
work for longer than planned and they accept mutual
and the atmosphere; for example, having shared
feedback in the search for positive results.
accommodation aids integration.

The different stages in the structure of a group, from
Transformation or change as a result of new

knowledge and experiences: the team reaches its goals
the first point of contact, are usually:
and the decision to continue is a voluntary one.
Initial meeting: during the first few moments of
The dynamic of a group in a training workshop can
meeting, a person has a series of questions about
be positive if everyone takes into consideration from
who the other people are, what they expect from
the start:
them, what can they contribute and what should they

say. Usually there is a concern about being accepted
Common and consistent objectives through

the whole process.
Clear procedures for reaching goals.
Rules of the game.
See: p.13, section 3.1. Conceptual framework, learning.

See: p. 71, section 6.1. Implementing the workshop, the
workshop induction.

With a moderator who helps identify the key
The trainers need to recognise these behavioural
questions and who provides options to the group,
characteristics, the positive and negative situations
the integration process can be speeded up and
that may arise and what they should decide to do to
maintain a strong group feeling. Each person is
consequently the group will work more efficiently.
unique and has his or her own way of participating.

Participation does not begin immediately, it is a
dynamic process that changes and if allowed becomes
The way in which individuals participate, swings
effective over time. Initially, the group takes an
between cooperation and competition. There are
apprehensive stance in which individuals only
participants who tend to dominate or impose
respond to their own uncertainties. The ice is usually
themselves on colleagues and others who are
broken when people introduce themselves and the
completely subordinate; some are very active and
adaptation and incorporation into the group begins;
others are very passive.
people lose their fears. Following the presentation

activity, a first level of familiarity with the participants
In a simplified way, we will distinguish between
is established which leads on to asking questions to
seven main types of participant, though we are aware
clarify their doubts. As familiarity increases, the critical
there are more: contradicting, bold or know-it-all,
level begins, in which the group questions the
indifferent, timid, joker or entertainer and the clown;
information it receives, suggests new ideas and
we describe these six types of participant in the
proposes alternatives to what has been presented.
chapter Problems.4
From this point on, the cohesion of the group is

stronger and there is ownership of the participation
The seventh type of participant is the positive one.
including self-managing and decision making.
Usually this participant helps the process of the

workshop, is accepted by the other participants and
These processes do not only occur linearly. Between
can be the point of support to promote the active
stages, the rhythms and emphasis are different. What
and creative participation of the group. If as a trainer
is more, the process can come to a halt or even
you identify various people with this characteristic
reverse according to the dynamic of the group and
within the group, we suggest you distribute them in
the skills of the training team.
the different working parties, to make the most of

their interest. You can then rely on them to resolve
3.3.4. How
do we participate?
any conflict within the group. You must, however,
The need to be part of a group and the situations
avoid favouritism towards these individuals in front
that exist in a workshop trigger different kinds of
of others; you should give fair and open attention
behaviour in each one of the participants. This
and equal treatment to all the participants.
depends on the individual personalities and the

specifics of each event personal desires and fears,
For a trainer who identifies a difficult participant
how one feels in relation to the other people, etc.
within the group, the first step would be to find out

the reason: What makes this person behave in this
3
4
See: p. 90, section 7.7. The training team, The moderator.

See: p. 193, section 9. Problems.
way? Is there something you can add or remove to

avoid this behaviour continuing?
25 / 204
26 / 204

The trainer should behave in as friendly and open a
person speaks and the others just passively receive
way towards the difficult participants as to the
that persons information). The investment of time
others, whilst ensuring that their behaviour does not
and resources, however, pays back with good results.
obstruct the participation of the group and being
The participatory process does not happen
careful not to develop prejudice or reservations about
automatically, because each group is different. What
them.
are needed are trainers who are experienced in

facilitating this process and who, with the group,
3.3.5. What
are the advantages and disadvantages

of a participatory focus?
will set suitable guidelines so the workshop succeeds

and develops. Also, bear in mind that conflicts are
intrinsic dynamics for the coexistence of the group,
The following are the advantages of developing a
so these situations can be managed and benefit the
participatory focus in the training workshop:
workshop.
It mobilises each persons capacity to consider,

analyse and adopt changes.
It is not easy to achieve balanced participation

with different personalities, because, for example,
some tend to dominate and impose themselves on
It allows each person to take part in the process
people and others are very shy. This is why an
and, therefore, consider themselves a beneficiary and
experienced moderator is needed who, with the right
be responsible for the acquired results and
educational tools and agreements, will achieve the
commitments.
best balance possible.
It helps understand problems from different points
Creating the ideal atmosphere for participation is
of view because it involves the differences in each
subject to a group of factors that depend on each
group in terms of age, gender, academic background,
other and should be mixed and added to as
ethnicity, culture and experiences.
appropriate. Learning a subject does not just depend
It provides the possibility of including alternatives
on a good trainer but also on the availability of
to solve problems.
learning material and the right logistics.
It makes learning much more intense and

productive because it is joint and shared. Whereas
Achieving participation is a
in conventional teaching, one person speaks and the
challenge that depends on a
others just passively receive the information.
combination of factors which you

are not always able to influence.
Despite these advantages and the ones that each

trainer will have, depending on experience, it is worth
bearing in mind some factors that could be considered
disadvantages but if they are well managed they
become virtues of the participatory focus:
That is why it is so important for the

participants to take ownership of the workshop
and participate in its development,
contributing to an open atmosphere which
generates trust. This way, they also take
responsibility for whether the workshop is a
success and they participate in finding
A participatory workshop requires more time and

materials than conventional training (when one
alternative solutions to problems that arise.

3.4.
Managing Time
There are 365 days in a year, that is 52 weeks; if we

exclude weekends and public holidays we are left
The 80/20 rule or

Paretos Principle
EFFORT
with the actual working days. There are 24 hours in
20% of
results
each day.
Despite the fact that we all know this and that we
RESULTS
80% of time
spent on a lot of
not-so-important
tasks
know our own skills and abilities, we often commit

ourselves to a number of jobs on the same day that
80% of
results
will take longer to do than the time available: the

day is not interested in how many commitments we
might have, it will always contain 24 hours and not a
minute more.
20% of time
spent on a few
essential tasks
Equally, each of those hours will continue to have

60 minutes, although sometimes it feels like there
are a lot less; the idea that time goes by fast is due in
part to the number of jobs we have to do in short
But, how do I identify the really essential and
periods of time, particularly when we are faced with
important tasks? Often, after we have completed an
the constraints of deadlines.
activity that we considered to be urgent, we realise

that it was not important and it could have waited;
How do we avoid this situation? To overcome and
that is why establishing the importance of a task is
avoid these difficulties, it is worth taking note of
not so easy and it is also a subjective view of the
time management or administration.
person or group taking the decision.
You must have asked yourself Why is it that some
The main characteristic of an important task is if it is
days two or three hours work and a little effort are

sufficient to meet most of the objectives of the day?
essential to meet the objectives. So the first step
This link between the achieved result and the amount
be to ask ourselves the following questions: Will
of time invested in it was analysed by the Italian
this task help me reach my goal? What will happen

if this task is not done?
economist, Vilfredo Pareto, more than 100 years ago;
towards finding out whether a task is important would
this investigation lead him to what today we call the

80/20 Rule: 80 per cent of what a person achieves
An urgent task, on the other hand, is one which is
(the objectives) is the product of 20 per cent of the
on our minds because there is a time limit attached
time invested in it. The challenge this principle poses
to it such as an approaching deadline or something
is to identify this 20 per cent - made up of a few
else such as an immediately available resource; the
tasks, which produce the best results - and
fact that a task is urgent, however, does not
concentrate our time and attention carrying this out.
necessarily make it important.
27 / 204
28 / 204

Following on, then, the next thing to consider, is
Applying this hypothesis helps to establish which
prioritising identifying tasks that are both urgent
tasks must be dealt with right away, which can be
and important. A practical way to prioritise tasks is
postponed without putting any objectives at risk, to
the way the US president Dwight Eisenhower did it:
find alternatives for others and so avoid the danger
everyday he categorised each task by its importance
of leaving important things incomplete because of
and how urgent it was.
too many commitments.

Careful follow-up of the next points can be useful to
Eisenhower's Principle
you for organising your time, both in your daily life
MOST
IMPORTANT
and when it comes to organising a training workshop:

SET A
STRATEGIC
TIMESCALE
DO THEM AS
SOON AS POSSIBLE
1. Make a list of outstanding tasks5 .

2. Decide which objective they are connected with
and group them together if appropriate.
W
INTO THE WASTE
PAPER BASKET
3. Study them one by one or in groups and put them

REDUCE THEM
DELEGATE THEM
in order of importance and urgency (Eisenhowers

principle).
LEAST
IMPORTANT
LEAST
URGENT
4. Establish how much time is needed to complete

each activity well and obtain the necessary materials
MOST
URGENT
to complete them. Sometimes, taking a few minutes

longer on each activity will avoid spending valuable
He put the most important and urgent tasks in the
time on other activities further ahead; for example,
A pile and did them right away. They could not be
allocating the right amount of time for a good workshop
postponed.
introduction (meeting participants, presenting the

objectives of the programme and finding out the
He put the tasks that were very important, but not
peoples expectations and pre-occupations) will save
very urgent, in the B pile, and then decided when
you having to carry out other tasks later on.
he would do them or if he could delegate them to

someone else.
5. Draw on your experience, intuition and instinct at

all times.
He put the less important but urgent tasks in the
C pile and endeavoured to delegate them or reduce
6. Do not put off tasks which should be done
their number.
immediately, focus on a few of them.
The tasks that remained, which were the least

important and least urgent, he put in the W pile
and threw them into waste paper basket.
See: Organising a training workshop,

Example of a work plan for organising a workshop, p. 52.

7. Some activities are dependent on a series of events;
should do the job, because they will have their own
this type of task will be satisfactorily completed if it is
ideas and experiences; but be sure that they have clearly
carried out step by step, bearing in mind the logical order
understood what is required and find out if they have
it has. Undertaking some tasks in haste does not lead to
any concerns.
meeting objectives.
Provide all the information and materials required to
8. Avoid interruptions and distractions and make sure
properly complete the task; organise a follow-up session
you enjoy carrying out each task.
to constructively find out how the work is progressing

but avoid interfering. These steps will help ensure that
9. Effectively delegate tasks which others can do.
the selected person submits a good job, for which they

should be praised and which will no doubt have added
But, how do I know which activities can be delegated?

The questions: Am I the only person who
can do it? and is it solely my

responsibility? may help you
decide which you can
to their skills bank. Finally, be sure to bear that persons

achievement in mind in future.
Another important topic to
highlight when you have
hand to someone else. In
fulfilled
any event, be careful
mitments is distractions.
when you hand out
Nowadays, most work
tasks,
places have various
because
delegating means sharing

responsibilities, not offloading them; remember, you
are the one who needs to be sure
the job is done.
your
com-
distractions; perhaps the

most common is the internet.
There are over 62 million
websites that offer such a large
amount of information that it is impossible to
completely understand and take it all on board; it is
The following steps may help you make a good decision
worth having dedicated areas for checking e-mail or
when deciding to delegate:
searching for a specific piece of relevant information.
Review the task and the objective it is part of.

Once you have established which
Choose the most suitable person (the tasks should
tasks are important and urgent, you
match their interests, talent and ability).
are in a better situation to spend

your time efficiently (meeting your
Let the selected person know what needs to be done
objective in a sensible period of time).
in a clear and all-encompassing way, what is expected

and why (activities and objectives).
Task lists, schedules and diaries are just tools

that help you to effectively manage your time
Be flexible and realistic with the deadline and do

not go into too much detail about how the person
and productivity. Remember that your brain
29 / 204
30 / 204

has its own memory and that this is the
Tell others about your tasks and the
most powerful tool a person has; make
deadlines.
the most of both sides of the brain to

schedule and meet your commitments.
When you are faced with a new task,

ask yourself how far you can commit
When you are in a difficult situation
yourself in the time period available.
and you are not clear about how to

continue to complete your work, the best
Remember you can say NO. This could
thing to do is stop, take a walk and think
be healthier than the stress brought on
about it or talk to someone about it; do
by a hasty yes.
not let the situation get any worse, have

a glass of water... It may be that
A good, well-ordered programme, with
afterwards you will come up with the
realistic timeframes is the key to
perfect solution. Trust your instincts
achieving everything within the chosen
and wealth of experience and always
parameters. Many aspects of the
make sure you enjoy doing your work.
workshop preparation will help with

time management when it comes to
So that you do not forget your
delivering the workshop; for example,
commitments the following could be
an early evaluation, sending out the
useful:
proposed programme including the

timetable and key information about
Set deadlines.
the logistics and other relevant details,

will mean that the participants arrive
Divide a job into stages that can be
informed, which will save time when it
carried out one after another.
comes to pr esenting the content.

Equally,
if
you
achieve
good
Visualise your commitments and
participation from the start, many parts
always have them in view so that you
of the workshop will flow with minimum
remember them.
time and stress. And, most of all:
Allocate colours to tasks to indicate

priority.
Dont leave until tomorrow

what you can do today!
The training workshop / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

4.
The training workshop
The need for prior preparation.
Development using controlled procedures.
One or more people to lead or moderate the

development.
lthough in this manual we will emphasise a specific

type of training events - the workshop - we think
4.1.1. The
speech
it is worthwhile to provide a general overview
The speech is the initial presentation of the subject
of other kinds of training events or situations, and
by an expert. It could be followed or accompanied
highlight their value and importance.
by a discussion with a facilitated session. The

purpose is to pass on information to a lot of people
Later we will refer to a number of fundamental
in a short space of time, share knowledge in a
characteristics of a workshop and throughout the
systematic way, find out what interests your
text we will highlight in detail many of the features
audience and so stimulate the subsequent
to bear in mind when planning and developing a
discussion. The moderator is restricted to
training workshop - from inception, to preparation,
introducing the presenter; later on he/she guides
execution, evaluation and the post-workshop
the discussion in the session, giving the presenter
stages.
an opportunity to answer questions from those

present. Audience participation is limited because
The responsibility of these different stages of the
it lessens the impact of what has been presented.
workshop is in the hands of the team members.
To avoid it becoming prolonged and dull, the
The qualities and functions of the members of this
presentation should be well prepared and delivered
team will be explained in the chapter The training
and should generate interest. If it is linked with
team.
participative materials, the level of audience

participation is increased.
4.1.
Types of training events
4.1.2. The
symposium
A symposium is a meeting in which a group of

A training event usually stems from the desire to
four to six people, trained and experts in their field,
help solve a problem. It can take on different forms,
deliver brief speeches to an audience. Their
from a simple meeting in which a person presents a
presentations are consecutive and provide different
subject, to a participatory event lasting several days.
angles on a central theme.
Choosing which type of event is suitable depends

on the training objective - what you want to address,
The objective is to provide the audience with
the subject matter and the profile of the participants.
new and wide-ranging information on a central
In other words, the what?, the why? and the for
theme in an orderly manner, clarify interlinking
whom?. Training events, which we will discuss later
problems and help the audience understand the
and for which there is an unending list, have the
connection between the different views of the
following elements in common:
specific theme.
31 / 204
32 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / The training workshop

The person who drives or moderates the progress
Finally, the chair can invite the public to put
of the symposium needs to know enough about
questions to those around the table about the
the subject to identify the links that exist between
ideas presented, making sure the responses do
each speech, manage the questions in terms of
not turn into long discussions. Audience
focus and time, motivate the audience and at the
participation is limited because the main discussion
end of the event, provide a synopsis of what has
of the event is around the table itself, among the
been covered.
specialists. It is advisable to keep the session to

less than one hour to allow time for questions from
Audience participation is limited although they can
the public.
put forward questions after each presentation and

at the end of the event but there is not really a
great deal of time for feedback or discussion.
4.1.4. The
panel
In this type of event, a group of three to six experts

or people qualified in a subject freely discuss and
A symposium may last from a few hours to a day.
debate what the chair or moderator puts forward.
If it is lengthy, it can become tiring.

Apart from the conversation being informal and
4.1.3. The
round table
The round table is made up of a number of speeches

by three to six specialists who have different points
of view on the same subject or problem. The
conflicting points of view, which may be antagonistic,
mean that the information is varied. The success of
the round table depends on the knowledge that the
specialists have on the theme and the way they
defend their positions. The specialists should be
spontaneous, in order for it to be successful, the

chair must have an in-depth knowledge of the
subject to initiate dialogue. The Chair must also
ask questions, guide the conversation, introduce
questions to keep the discussion on track, be able
to overcome possible moments of tension that
might arise and keep an eye on the time. Once the
expert discussion has come to an end, the chair
highlights the most important conclusions and
invites the audience to participate.
selected according to their points of view these

should be different and even opposing. The person
Participation is limited because usually information
who chairs the round table needs to make sure they
is only introduced in the speeches, and if the
know the main characteristics of these specialists
audience does not have a certain amount of
(domineering, talkative, quiet, aggressive, etc), to be
knowledge, they will not be able to take advantage
able to keep the discussion lively and encourage
of the discussion. This type of discussion does not
different opinions.
always provide efficient learning.
At the end, a summary and conclusion are provided,
A panel can last between 30 and 60 minutes.
highlighting the mutual points and the differences

of opinion between the points of view. If the chair
4.1.5. The
does not manage the table well, there may be
A conference is an event involving a lot of people,
unproductive discussions that do not promote
which is built around an idea, theme or problem
learning.
with a large amount of content which is defined in
Conference

advance. The delegates are almost always familiar
practice and theory on a theme, making the most
with the theme.
of the experience of the participants and their

training needs.
In a conference, the experts present themes and

sub themes at the same time. This means that the
A limited number of people take part in a
delegates cannot attend all the presentations but
workshop. There is collective participation to carry
they can organise their own programme by
out an active, creative, specific, punctual and
choosing from what is on offer and what fits in
systematic job. This is achieved by means of
with their interests and needs.
contribution and exchange of ideas, discussions,

agreement and other creative standpoints that help
The object of a conference is to provide new
to lead to points of view and new alternative
knowledge to a wide group of people. Preparation
solutions to given problems.
and organisation of this type of event is the joint

responsibility of various people in charge of
The main aim of a training workshop, is that the
different areas of work. If the group is very large,
participants, in line with their needs, reinforce what
it should be divided into subgroups with the main
they have learned through reflection and
subject in mind, so that by the end, the conclusions
discussions focussed on the shared concepts and
of each group can be merged. To make the most
methodologies. To achieve this, a group of people
of this event, in the final session agreements or
needs to be responsible for organising, facilitating
recommendations must be reached and some kind
and chairing the training sessions, so that they help
of commitment formalised.
and guide the group of participants to achieve their

learning objective.
Given the size, participation is minimal and a group

dynamic is not established, meaning that both
Its great advantage is that it can develop in a group
learning and feedback are limited. The delegates
and participative atmosphere. This allows space
take on a passive role and just listen; as a result,
for exchanging experiences and thus stimulating
little of the content of the event is remembered
varied learning. If, however, at the start there is
afterwards.
not a clear commitment, the workshop will be in

vain.
The conference organisers interests take

precedence over the delegates real needs and
The duration of a workshop and the number of
problems. However, it can make a large amount
participants depends on a number of criteria, in
of information accessible to a lot of people, with
particular the need to study in depth and expand
institutional backing that can give it credibility.
on the training theme.
A conference may last for a day and as long as
According to what we have discussed previously,
seven days.
while only one expert delivers the speech, various

experts are involved in both the symposium and
4.1.6. The
workshop
It is a collective building space that combines
the round table. In the round table the presenters

hold differing and opposing points of view, leaving
33 / 204
34 / 204

room for debate; in the panel, the panellists freely
Who the participants will be
Schedule format
Follow-up format
speak and debate among themselves; and in the

symposium, the experts speak separately and
consecutively about their own ideas, whether they
agree or not, but all connected with a central theme,
so that at the end of the event that theme has been
thoroughly covered.
Most of these tasks are the coordinators

responsibility.1
Once any of these events has finished, it is possible

to provide an informal space for debate. In such
4.2.1. Preliminary
analysis of need
an event, the moderator can invite the participants
Training is a step towards the solution of a problem.
to hold a discussion about what has been debated.
That is why, before planning the workshop, it is
At this stage, the presenters can attend or not, as
worth studying the causes of the problem and
they choose.
identifying the possible routes that lead to the

solution.
The conference and the workshop both last days,

they are expensive and require a lot of organisation.
The creation of a workshop begins with evaluating
This means that they depend on financial backing
the needs of the beneficiaries or those affected by
from organisations with an interest in the subject.
the problem. These people not only include

potential participants of the training event, but also
From here on, we will concentrate on the type
those who hold an interest in positive change, even
of event we are concerned with, the training
though they may not be the ones who directly
workshop.
receive the training.

It often seems easy to identify the problem; for
4.2
Creating the training

workshop
example, there are times we believe the problem

is lack of money or lack of management. Only
through shared and realistic examination and
This chapter covers the necessary conditions and
reasoning that address the needs of men, women
the required steps for designing a good training
and children, can we measure the extent of the
workshop and provides genuine solutions to given
problem and identify the right conclusion among
problems.
a number of possibilities that ensures the

proposed alternative process will indeed lead us
The creation of the workshop includes the
to resolve it. Training means that the participants
following steps:
will improve their knowledge and build on their

ability to find solutions to their problems, using
Preliminary analysis of need
Key questions for planning
the appropriate methods available to them.

1
See p. 87, Section 7.6 The Training team. The coordinator.

Example
The law in certain countries grants the indigenous
communities the right to special community
development funds. If one of these communities
does not know how to access these resources, they
may decide to employ a specialist to manage these
Why have the workshop?

What is the current situation and what is the desired
situation?
It is worth justifying the workshop, analysing and
valuing other options for solving the problem and
reaching the desired change.
funds and represent the community in discussions

with the authorities. This solution is one of the
possible ways of dealing with the matter, and the
result is reliable. Alternatively, if the community
better analysed the situation, it could have chosen
a more permanent solution: train some of the
members on the fundamentals, the procedures and
conditions relating to the management of the

resources that the community wants to acquire.
Why have the workshop?

What are the desired results?
It is worth defining clear and realistic objectives,
indicating who should be developed, how and why
build on their knowledge and skills at a particular
time. We differentiate between a prime objective
what general process is the workshop contributing
to and from this the specific objective.
This solution allows the community itself to acquire

the knowledge and skills needed to take such a
procedure through to a conclusion as often as
necessary and at the same time develop a new
strength that makes the community more

autonomous in its liaison with the State.
Preliminary analysis is the responsibility of the
institution or organisation involved in carrying out
Who is the workshop aimed at?

Who are the people who will attend
the workshop?
The first step is to decide on the ideal profile
of your participants. Then compare the actual
profile of the people who wish to attend. This
will help adapt the different components of the
workshop.
the training, or of a person contracted to organise

and prepare the workshop. Whoever has this
responsibility is called the coordinator.
4.2.2. Key
questions for planning
With the preliminary analysis the basic information

is gathered to create and plan the workshop. It is
worthwhile, however, checking and doublechecking the need for the training, using the
following questions as a guide:
See p. 87 Section 7.6 The training team, The coordinator.
What is the workshop content?

What knowledge do you
wish to convey?
We distinguish between subjects that the
participants are and are not familiar with. In the
first instance, the workshop will focus on the
exchange of experiences and on building common
ground. In the second, there will be input from
experts to stimulate learning.
How is the workshop run?
What are the right tools and methodology?
Learning depends on didactic planning, so the
choice of tools needs careful consideration.
35 / 204
36 / 204

Who is the workshop run with?

Which institutions will run and support the
workshop?
Usually there is an institution responsible for this,
but to increase the effects of the training it is worth
looking for links with other
organisations.
That is why they need to be suitable for achieving a

good group atmosphere.4
A workshop is often part of a series of training events.
In such an event, you will consider the previous
experiences and will share yours with the people
organising the following event. This way
you can adapt the focus and content
of the training on an ongoing
Who makes up the training

team?
We will explain the roles
and responsibilities of
each member of the
training team in the
appropiate chapter.3
basis.
Who the participants

will be
4.2.3.
As with all workshops, you will

have a defined participant group
or a group that fits a specific
When does the workshop take

place and how long should it last?
What are the dates?
You need to be sure that dates of the workshop do
not coincide with public holidays or other special
events and that the length of the workshop suits the
kind of participants that will be attending.
profile.
In the case of the former, they could, for
example, be people who all work for the same
kind of organisation. In this case the programme and
the activities are adapted to this particular group.
One example is a strategic planning workshop for
members of the X Foundation.
What resources does the workshop require?

What resources do you have already?
What resources need to be brought in?
When compiling the budget, include each and every
activity and requirement of the workshop, how much
they cost and identify possible sources of finance.
In the second case, you may have the opportunity

to define the participant type and from there you
will create the workshop structure. For example, a
training workshop on carrying capacity on visited
areas for the eco tourism department or section staff
of an invited organisation.
How much time is needed to prepare a workshop?

It is worth being objective when calculating the time
needed for each of the preparatory tasks. It is also
worth beginning far enough in advance.
Where does the workshop take place?
What place and which specific venue?
Issues such as the place and the surroundings for
the workshop can favour or jeopardise the event.
The criteria to consider when defining the

participants profile are the following:
See p. 83, Chapter 7. The training team.
See p. 44, Section 5.6. The workshop venue.

The persons actual role:
greater, although there are fields of work where this
Their connection with the subject matter, their
balance is difficult to achieve. The invitation should
autonomy, their influence within the organisation and
clearly state what can be expected in this respect
their seniority. For example, when choosing
and how it might be achieved, for example, by
participants for a workshop based on accounting and
providing childcare facilities to enable women to
administrative issues, it is desirable to invite the
attend.
person responsible for accounts and whoever is

responsible for procurement.
Age:
Depending on our age, we might have different ways
The organisation that the participant represents:
of expressing ourselves and different experiences that
Depending on the objective of the workshop, you
may enrich debate in a workshop but, as with gender,
will opt for similarities that will enrich the exchange
working with the subject matter is the main focus.
of experiences. To develop some themes it is worth

a variety of organisations taking part including
Cultural background:
government departments, non-governmental
For some themes, contribution and exchange are
organisations and businesses, for example, a
essential including the participation of representatives
workshop on environmental management methods
from different regions, cultures and ethnic
and techniques. Also remember to include all the
backgrounds.
appropriate organisations when dealing with a

specific subject.
Number of participants:
The right number of participants depends on the
The existing experience and knowledge the participant may
dynamic and materials being used in the workshop.
have of the subject material or problems being looked at:
The ideal number for a participatory workshop is
Check whether, to achieve the objectives of
between 15 and 20 people. Many workshops will
workshop, everyone in the group needs to have the
have more. Remember though, that quantity does
same level of knowledge and experience or not.
not mean quality - the larger the group, the less time
available for each person to contribute and actively
Motivation and attitude towards the subject material, the
participate in a workshop.
methodology and attendance at a participatory training

event:
Deciding the on the number of participants also has
This is a difficult area to influence but should be
an effect on the cost and effectiveness of the
considered when compiling the invitation or
workshop. There will be a negative effect if there
announcement. Ideally, the people who attend the
are either too many or too few participants, because
workshop should do so because they are interested
there are some costs that are not directly dependent
in the subject and because they want to, rather than
on the number of participants, such as the trainers
because they are instructed to do so by their superiors.
fees, which, if they are more than a certain amount,

the need for costly solutions may arise.
Gender:
We recommend a gender balance in workshops
4.2.4. Compiling
the programme
because when this occurs the impact is usually
Compiling the programme requires the best possible
37 / 204
s
60 - 9 0
mi n
u te
s
u te
mi n
15 - 9 0
60 - 9 0
mi n
u te
Mi d - d
a
60 - 9 0 y b r e
mi n a k
u te
s
tes
90 m i
nu
15 - 3 0
mi n
u te
90 m i
nut
es
38 / 204
Structure of a workshop day

combination of the above criteria, in such a way that
The understanding of a subject is improved if existing
it motivates and satisfies the needs of the participants.
knowledge is linked to new information and if the

simple is linked with the complex; this also
The most effective stimuli in an adult workshop are
encourages active participation. It is worth alternating
the relationship between the subject or problem in
between active and passive sessions combining
question, the methodology being used and the
plenary sessions, group work and individual work,
possibility of applying what has been learned.
leaving enough time for individual reflection and

extracurricular discussion. This allows the participants
The format that we propose can be developed along
to absorb the subject matter.
the following lines:

At the beginning and end of each activity be sure to
a. Defining the subject focus and methodology of

the workshop and drawing up the first draft of the
workshop agenda
Divide the main theme into relevant sub-themes and
find the appropriate materials for working on these
themes, bearing in mind the group characteristics
mentioned earlier and use this to draw up the first
draft of the agenda.5
b. Drawing up the first programme format
Ideally, develop a modular structure that adapts easily
to the theme, the time available and the tools. There
are a number of tools for dealing with the same
theme; choose the most suitable for achieving your
objective.
c. Deciding on the order of the subjects and the
methodology
summarise by putting the theme into context, thus

maintaining a thread throughout the whole
workshop.
d. Define the evaluation process

Evaluation is a process of critical analysis of the
different components and of the workshop as a
whole. It is therefore worth planning ongoing
evaluation and evaluation at the end of the
workshop.6 How often continuous assessments take
place, depends on the length of the workshop. If
possible, carry out evaluations at the end of each
day to establish shortcomings and errors and to
5
See p. 55, section 5.10.4. Organising a training workshop,

6
See p. 73, section 6.1.5; p. 77, section 6.3.3. Implementing

the workshop - on going evaluation; workshop evaluation

foresee difficult situations or reinforce positive points
advisable to plan light-hearted sessions and/or a rest
in the workshop. The results of the evaluations affect
day. For example, have an evening out or a party,
the ongoing process of the workshop.
get to know the area or organise cultural visits. This

also aids group interaction.
e. Setting the timetable

When setting the timetable for each day, remember
that we are more receptive if the days are short.7 It is
therefore worth limiting the sessions to a total of six
hours per day, spreading them out along the following
lines: two sessions of 90 minutes in the morning with
a break between each; then a rest at mid-day for an
hour or an hour and a half, and finally two sessions
in the afternoon, again with a break in-between.
f. Other points
When planning the programme you should also
include the technical equipment requirements, the
opening times of the places that may be visited, as
well as other points that may arise depending on the
type of workshop you are planning.
At this stage, it is also worth thinking about possible
alternatives, devising what is known as a plan B
for each activity in the programme, in case the original
plan is thwarted. From experience we know that
there is an alternative for each need. The detailed
programme will be put together with the training
team once all the above criteria have been analysed
and defined.
Defining the follow-up

Follow-up is a key part of the workshop although
often, little attention is given to it. The learning
The start and end times depend on the customs of
process does not end with the workshop; therefore,
the participants, on the weather and the venue
if there is interest in holistic learning, it is worth
conditions.
thinking about what mechanisms and resources are

needed to achieve a follow-up to find out how the
8
As well as each person having their own biorhythm,
participants apply what they have learned and shared,
as we mentioned previously, people generally have
or at least have some contact with them and know
better concentration in the morning and less in the
about their experiences after the workshop.
afternoon. That is why we recommend planning the

sessions that require greatest concentration in the
Once the workshop has finished, there are usually
morning and find a way of raising the dynamics of
two things that can be done: the first is writing a
the afternoon sessions.
technical and financial report about how the

workshop was run, and the second is sending out
If the workshop lasts longer than a week, it is
documentation or a report. We suggest that at this

stage of planning the workshop, the follow-up is
7
8
See: p. 13, section 3.1. Conceptual framework, Learning.

See: p. 17, section 3.1. Conceptual framework, Learning.
decided upon; we recommend two options that can

be combined:
39 / 204
40 / 204

Post-workshop written evaluation

This is done using a postal or emailed questionnaire.
At the same time you can establish whether the goals
have been met. First, you should have a clear
objective for the evaluation and let the participants
know during the workshop that you are going to do
this and when and how it will take place.
Intermittent contact
The coordinator makes contact with the participants
to establish how useful the workshop has been and
what are their current needs. This is also agreed
during the workshop. At the same time you can check
if they fulfilled the goals set in the workshop.
Permanent pre-arranged contact
Support via the internet
This can be between the participants themselves or
If all the participants have access to the internet, it is
with the training team and is to support and check
the most modern way of providing support. It
the fulfilment of the goals.
requires good preparation and particular logistics.

To achieve this, create a forum in which the
Support
participants can continue discussing the relevant
It is advisable that someone be assigned to supporting
subjects, supporting each other. You can also contract
the participants in completing the post-workshop
someone to support this forum. With the right
tasks. Announce this during the workshop and devise
equipment, this is the most cost-effective method.
a timetable. Ideally, the person with this role should

attend the workshop.
Follow-up workshop or meeting

To reinforce learning and find out how things have
progressed, you can organise a get-together. This
exchange of experience can last between half a day
and several days, depending on the need and how
you wish to set it up. You can use a few key questions
that will help and guide the participants to reflect on
the benefits, difficulties and gaps that exist since the
training process.
Organising a training workshop / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

5.
Organising a training
workshop
The organisational stages and the tasks.

The time each task requires.
The person responsible.
The deadline for each activity.
reparation is the key to a successful workshop.

To a large extent, careful organisation of a
workshop guarantees that everything goes
From the list of activities, identify the daily tasks and

make a work plan as follows:
according to plan and with minimum difficulty.
Calculate the time each task will take.
Once the conceptual phase has taken place, in which
Analyse the importance and urgency of each one
the objectives, the selection criteria for the participants,
and identify which are a priority and which can be
the themes, methodology, tools and the preliminary
delegated.2
programme have been defined, you can begin to

organise the workshop.
Thinking about the following points will help you
Build in cushioning time for unexpected

circumstances.
Create a timetable.
organise your training well:

The tasks need not necessarily be carried out by the
The work plan.
Selecting and contracting the training team.
Setting the dates.
same person; various people can and should be

appointed. This allows those responsible to focus on
their commitments and the workshop coordinator to
maintain overall control of the organisation.3
Inviting the participants.
Selecting and contracting the

training team
5.2.
The budget.
The workshop venue.
The workshop coordinator selects and coordinates the

Selecting and organising the venue.
The necessary materials.
Preparing the day prior to the workshop.
5.1.
The work plan
The first step in organising your workshop is to draw

up a work plan,1 making the following clear:
training team and decides how the team should be

made up. The criteria and tasks that correspond to
each member of the group are looked at in detail in
the chapter The training team.
See P. 52, Section 5.10.1 Organising a training workshop,

Example of a work plan
2 See P. 27, Section 3.4 Conceptual framework, Managing time
3 See P 83, Section 7 The training team
41 / 204
42 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Organising a training workshop

Inviting the participants
When selecting members of the team, it is worth:
5.4.
Keeping in mind the skills and knowledge that each
5.4.1. Announcement
person should have and the duties they will be
The main purpose of the announcement is to reach
responsible for.
the desired participant profile groups characterised by

terms such as gender, ethnicity, age, academic back-
Identifying the people with the above characteristics.
ground, work experience, etc.
You can check the information these people provide,

by contacting other institutions or people in the sec-
Initially, an announcement is made at institutional level
tor. Create a directory with this information.
providing information about the objectives and thematic

content and suggesting the profile criteria for selecting
Getting in touch with the people you have identified.
participants.
From this point on, it is essential to clarify the duties

and responsibilities for each person. Occasionally,
The announcement gives the first impression of the
someone you contact may help establish contacts with
workshop and the organisations responsible for it. This
other similar people.
is why it is worth dedicating a lot of careful thought to

it and prior to production, remember the following:
Agreeing terms and conditions of work and deciding

whether a contract is necessary.
Who the appropriate person is in an organisation

that the invitation should be addressed to (exact
position, duties, office, etc).
5.3.
Setting the workshop dates

Decide which person or persons sign the
The length of the workshop is governed by the
announcement: the representatives of the organisations
proposed objectives and the budget available. It also
and funding bodies involved, the coordinator or both.
depends on the time the team and participants have

available, because, as a result of the position and
Prepare information in advance that should
responsibilities many people have at their place of work,
accompany the announcement: including background,
they may not able to be away for long periods. With
objectives, general framework of the workshop,
this in mind, along with the
information about the
workshop content, an
organisations involved, the
appropriate duration of the
draft programme,4 the da-
workshop is set.
tes, the venue and perhaps

a questionnaire.
When it comes to setting

the date, be careful to
avoid clashes with public
holidays
and
other
activities that may be of

interest to participants.
See P. 65, Section 5.10.9

Organising a training
workshop, Example of a
preliminary survey

The announcement should be sent out far enough
make. If necessary, you can ask the participants
in advance that the potential participant can set aside
to bring to the workshop material about the
the time for the workshop. If you send it as a letter,
organisations they come from, such as publications,
consider the distance and communication difficulties
maps, posters or videos. You can also establish
between the sender and the potential participant.
logistical information; for example, special dietary

requirements, technical equipment, or what time and
Outline the enrolment conditions: cost if any and
by what means of transport they will arrive. This survey
means of payment, the commitment of the participants,
allows you to adapt the organisation and the
deadlines, etc.
programme of the workshop to the profile and needs

of the participants.
The announcement can be sent by conventional post,

by fax or email.5 Experience has shown us that it is
better to send the first announcement by conventional
post. Subsequent contact and invitations can be
made via which ever means is most convenient and
fastest.
5.4.2. Enrolment
Specify a deadline for enrolment on the workshop,

which ideally should be four to six weeks before the
training. You will then have enough time to adapt the
programme to the profile of the participants who have
5.4.4. Contact
enrolled. Confirmation can be speeded up using the
It is worthwhile contacting the participants about a
telephone. Be clear in recommending that the
week before the workshop, to advise them of the final
participant puts aside time to attend the entire
programme and to confirm information about the
workshop. With the enrolment you can create a
venue, the start time, the arrival process and the
directory of
participants.6
prior to the workshop
reception; provide them with a map of how to get to

the venue and with other information that seems
5.4.3. Confirmation
and preliminary survey
appropriate, such as details of suitable clothing for the
Send a personal invitation as confirmation to the
climate or the workshop (for example, boots, torches,
participants who have enrolled. This can be
waterproofs, sun cream, hats, etc, for field trips).
accompanied by a preliminary survey using a

questionnaire that explores the level of knowledge
of the workshop theme, the participants needs,
5.5.
Budget
expectations and possible contributions he/she might

The size of the budget ultimately defines the duration
5
See p. 60 Section 5.10.6 Organising a training workshop,

Example of an announcement of invitation
6 See p. 69 Section 5.10.11 Organising a training workshop,
Directory form
of the workshop, the number of participants, the ability

to contract trainers, the availability of technical
equipment and the logistical provisions and standard
of accommodation. In accordance with the primary
43 / 204
44 / 204

and essential requirements, preference is given to
these additional expenses because often they are not
certain expenditure, to succeed in covering the cost of
included in quotes or estimated costs.
the total spending on the workshop. A list of

expenditure includes, among other things, the following
Unexpected expenses: usually, allow a margin of
costs:
five to seven per cent of the total budget.
Professional fees, possible travel and food and
This preliminary budget should be approved as early
accommodation expenses for the training team, for
as possible by the bodies financing the workshop, so
attending the workshop and for meetings prior to the
that you can continue to focus on the necessary
event.
activities.7
Hiring the meeting rooms and equipment, including
As the organisation of the workshop progresses, each
computers, overhead projector, multimedia video
item of expenditure is established, being careful not to
projector and other equipment you may require.
go over budget. Keep the receipts for each expense in

line with the requirements of the funding body, making
Cost of travel, food and accommodation expenses
sure you have made the appropriate tax adjustments,
for the participants that the workshop will cover, such
if required. If this is necessary, we recommend you list
as flights, overland transport, river or sea passage or a
the expenditure so that at the end of the project your
combination of different modes of transport, transfer
expenses will be in order.
between air and land terminals. Establish whether part

or all of these expenses can be met by the organisations
Once the workshop is over, close the accounts and
backing the participants or by the participants
prepare a financial report.
themselves.
Materials that need to be purchased (such as paper,
marker pens, cards, notebooks, pens, glue, printer
cartridges, printing paper, flip chart or any other items
that the workshop, depending on its specific nature,
may require). Also include in the budget the relevant
transportation costs of these materials.
Other services (such as telephone, fax, internet
access, photocopies, film processing, translation and
equipment for simultaneous translating, etc).
Transport for excursions or field trips and expenses
these will incur.
Taxes that must be paid on top of expenditure such
as fees, food and accommodation etc. Keep in mind
5.6.
The workshop venue
5.6.1. Conditions
The ideal location for a workshop should have the

following attributes:
A main conference room with between two and
five small rooms in close proximity for group work. If
the venue does not have this many rooms, parts of the
main conference room and other spaces, such as
gardens, wide corridors and lobbies can be used. Be
sure, though, that any such areas are suitable for group
7 See p. 68 Section 5.10.10 Organising a training workshop,
An example of a budget form

work. One of these additional rooms could

serve as an office.
Appropriate
technical
infrastructure public
telephones, power sockets,
audiovisual equipment,
internet access, etc. If the
venue does not have all
the necessary equipment,
be sure to find what you
need or look for alternatives.
Be close to the accommodation.
Appropriate lighting: windows

that let in natural light are essential
because it is healthier and more
comfortable than artificial
light. Also, windows should
have curtains or blinds to
darken the room for slide
shows and videos or for
use if the sun reflects too
much on the work areas.
If the workshop has artificial lighting, ascertain in
advance that the lights work and
that they are adequate.
Be easily accessible: have easy and inexpensive
Adequate air circulation and temperature: the ideal
access to public transport; be a place which all
temperature for a meeting room is 22 degrees

centigrade (71.6F) and it is advisable that the area is
well ventilated with fresh air. If air conditioning or
heating is unavoidable ensure that the temperature is
constantly at the ideal level and try to ventilate the
room with fresh air whenever possible, for example,
during the breaks. Where possible, avoid drafts in the
conference room.
interested parties can get to with minimum

inconvenience. If there is no public transport to the
venue, you should hire transport services to ensure
the safe and timely arrival of the participants and the
training team.
Be quiet and safe enough to allow those involved
to concentrate on their work.
Be close enough to services that may be required,
such as film processing, photocopying, medical
assistance or the recreational activities.
5.6.2. Workshop
conference room
The conference room must have:
Sufficient space: a room for a group of 15 people

should be ten by seven metres (70 metres squared);
for a group of around 25 people it should be
approximately 15 by 10 metres (150 metres squared).
We suggest you avoid long rooms. The space should
Comfortable and flexible seating and light tables, so

the set-up can be altered according to the needs of the
workshop: we recommend putting the seats in a single semi-circular row or U shape, enough for those
present and removing excess seating. There should
be enough space between the chairs; the space
between the participants and the display board or
flipchart should be free of tables and other objects,
providing the activity does not demand a different setup. We recommend using chairs with a built-in table
or providing the participants with a surface to lean on
to allow them to take notes. Two or three tables are
required to put materials on.
be free of obstructions; for example, no pillars or

columns in the middle of the room that obstruct
The main workshop meeting room should have the
visibility.
following characteristics:
45 / 204
46 / 204

Example of the layout of

furniture and equipment in the training room
Display board
or screen
Flipchart
Table and chair
for the trainer
Chair
Table for
materials
Good acoustics and sound proofing between rooms
travel agents), workshop timetables and exact plans,
or areas where other events may be taking place to
telephone directories and other useful information. This
avoid interruption or interference with the training
office can also be used as a store for visual materials
process.
and technical equipment.
Walls or freestanding surfaces for hanging posters
5.6.4. Accommodation
so that they can be seen when necessary. Ensure when
The balance between the available budget and
hanging posters you do not damage the walls.
comfortable surroundings will determine the choice

of accommodation. Ideally, it should be quiet, clean,
Close to toilets, office, group work rooms or areas,
have comfortable beds, have the necessary facilities
the dining room and the refreshment/snack areas.
for the climate, surroundings and customs, because if

someone feels uncomfortable there or does not sleep
5.6.3. The
workshop office
It is worth having a room that can be used as an office
well, they will not able to participate fully in the

workshop.
and that is as close as possible to the conference room.

Ideally, this office should have a computer, printer,
5.6.5. Food
telephone, email, access to a photocopier and a fax.
Just like the other spaces, it is worth having the dining
This space can be used for having nearby lists of the
room close to the main conference room. Suitable food
most important contact details (for doctors, airlines,
for a workshop is light and varied and allows for

participants possible requirements. It is

important that the refreshments and the
meals are served on time to avoid delays
in the timetable.
Agree in advance with those responsible
for catering where and when food should
be provided. Make sure that there is water
and hot drinks (for example, coffee)
available close to the conference room. If
possible, provide local food and products.
Needless to say, make sure the hygiene
and quality of the food is acceptable.
5.6.6. Communication
We know it is very difficult to find a venue

that fits all the criteria for each workshop.
You will therefore have to balance the cost
with the advantages of the venue. Costs can
be reduced by using alternatives; for
example, two workgroups carry out their tasks in the
conference room; or eat in a nearby restaurant and offer
fruit and food as refreshments which are organised by
the training team. You can also book twin rather than
single rooms but take care and be tactful when allocating
people their rooms. The information acquired in the
preliminary survey can help establish who could share
with whom or whether you leave the choice to the
participants.
The participants may want to contact their

homes and offices; and being able to do
this contributes to the feeling of well-being
of the group. A public telephone is
therefore necessary for making local and
long distance calls, as well as internet
access. If this is not possible, a mobile
We recommend you make a list of criteria for choosing

the most appropriate venue for the workshop. Book and
safeguard the chosen venue as early as possible but be
aware of any penalties if the workshop is cancelled; if this
possibility exists, it is better to choose a venue that accepts
this risk without any charge.
telephone or whatever means of

communication in the area could serve this
purpose. It is also advisable that the
organisers of the workshop have the right
kind and number of prepaid phone cards
for the system available; our experience
has taught us that the participants will be
grateful to be able to purchase them.
We recommend visiting the venue beforehand to be sure

it fits the training criteria. If the person coordinating the
workshop cannot travel, he/she can contact people who
are able to check that the venue meets the criteria. When
making the preliminary visit, you should decide with the
management of the venue, on the previously mentioned
list of logistical requirements.
Spending should be cautious. Excessive luxuries can give
an inappropriate impression of the funding organisations.
The most important part of the workshop is the training,
integration and harmony of the group. This is also
achieved through creative and innovative ideas and by
making the most of the natural and cultural
characteristics of the venue without going as far as having
exaggerated luxuries or lavish events.
47 / 204
48 / 204

5.7.
Materials
Display Board Sample
For a participative and visual

workshop along the lines of
what we propose in this manual, the materials referred to
below
are
required.
circumstances
If
Titles of diagrams
and questions
and/or
availability means you cannot

obtain these, it is possible to
find suitable alternatives
depending on the workshop
Titles of
categories
Titles of themes
or questions
Ideas and
information
Highlight,
arrange,
evaluate
and the participants.

Depending on the duration and
number of participants, we
Ideas and
information
recommend you have the

following:
Display Boards: The use of
Ideas and
information
display boards in a visual

workshop is essential; for a
workshop of 25 people it is
ideal to have around 15
portable boards. These are light
panels, with a metal or plastic
frame and a working area of
about 120 by 150 centimetres,
on which you can easily attach
and remove cards; the advantage of this surface - which
about five millimetres thick will serve the purpose of
can be made of cork, expandable polystyrene or felt
displaying the exercises, essentially, because they are
is that you can use drawing pins to attach cards.
light and portable.
Although the number of boards mentioned is the ideal,
One or two flipcharts and sufficient paper:
what is important is that you have a surface available
approximately five to ten sheets per day, depending
(it can be a brick or wooden wall, or an improvised
on the tools being used.
surface) on which to attach posters so they are

permanently visible. If this is the case, three or four
Kraft / brown paper for covering the display boards:
panels or boards may be sufficient. If this lower number
about 20 sheets per day. The sheets should be cut to
of boards is not available, some polystyrene panels
fit the size of the display boards of polystyrene boards.

Cover the surface of the boards with the dull surface
5.8.
The day before the workshop
facing up; this makes it easier to take good photographs.

The day before the workshop takes place is very
Stiff paper or cards in different colours and shapes:
important for finalising many parts of the organising
the number and dimensions of the materials required
stage that may still be incomplete and establishing
in a visual training workshop are specified in the list
whether you may need Plan B. The person in charge
of materials that we have included at the end of this
of the coordination of the workshop ensures that the
chapter.8
other members of the training team are present from

that day.
Marker pens: at least one black marker pen per

person (refillable, if possible), and approximately 12
The training team meets up and addresses any
coloured pens including blue, red and green to
outstanding issues relating to the workshop: revises
highlight information. Warning: avoid marker pens with
and adjusts the general programme including materials
round nibs because the writing is not easy to read
and equipment needs checking it is in good working
(use
order additional academic support and logistic details.
chiselled
nibs)
and
remember
the
recommendations about the use of colours.
Then everyone revises and adjusts the script for the

first day10 and finally draws up the agenda.11
Other materials: such as pins and pin cushions,

different coloured labels or adhesive paper, glue and
The agenda is the chronological description and order
sticky or masking tape, scissors, stapler, hole punch,
of different activities that take place each day, setting
paper clips, pencils, pens, note books, calculator,
out the time allocated for each item. The relationship
printing paper, folders and materials for compiling a
between these activities and the training objectives,
photo storyboard, acetates or transparencies with
together with your experience and common sense,
appropriate marker pens for writing on them, labels
serve as a reference to establish how long each day
for writing the names of the participants and the training
will last. The continual display of the agenda means
team, film and batteries for the camera and possibly
that everyone knows the different themes being
the video camera; sweets and toys for the planned
covered, what timetable they are working to and it
activities, such as a ball, a soft toy animal, a whistle or
helps to make the best use of time. It also gives an
bell, a watch, dice, a first aid kit and materials you
idea of the results for each day. Be conscious of the
may need depending on the theme of the training
circadian cycle12 when compiling the agenda and try
workshop.
to dedicate mornings to the activities which require

most creativity and intellectual effort.
It is a good idea to organise the material in boxes or

cases; this way it will be easy to see and you will
notice when something is
missing.9
See P 53 Section 5.10.2 Organising a training workshop,

List of workshop venue requirements
9 See P 54 Section 5.10.3 Organising a training workshop,
List of materials. . .
The allocation of time in the programme and in the

agenda is a delicate business, because activities almost
10 See P 86 Section 7.5 The training team, The script
11 See P 55 Section 5.10.4 Organising a training workshop,

See P 17 Section 3.1.3 Conceptual Framework,
Learning
12
49 / 204
50 / 204

in the opening session, and
always take longer than

planned. The training team,
using their experience and
Methods and Techniques for

Environmental Management
establishes equipment needs

for their contribution. Make
focussing on the aim of the
enquiries so that you have
activity itself, will make
time to put the resources in
proposals and agree what is
place.
the right amount of time for

presentations, group work,
If necessary, clarify any so-
visits, excursions and full
cial activities that may need
sessions not forgetting
to be included in the
enough time for breaks and
welcome programme. It
meals.
WELCOME
could be a drink or a cocktail that is offered once the
Usually, for the first day of
formal opening has taken
the workshop, various
place
activities need to be
appropriate
programmed in connection
example, in the first break,
or
at
another
time;
for
with the opening of the event - introducing the
during lunch or on the first night. In any event, take
participants, the objectives and expectations, the
advice from the sponsors.
methodological decisions and the general information

relating to the event; all of these require enough
As almost certainly some of the participants may arrive
quality13
and/or equipment in
that day before the workshop, the coordinator will be
good working order that should be prepared in
occupied with greeting them and settling them in; if
advance. Remember to allow enough time so that these
necessary, he/she will personally make informal
points are perfectly clear; this way you will save time
introductions to the training team. If anyone has not
during some of the development stages of the
received the information sent to the other participants,
workshop. If you think it is necessary, have rehearsals.
this is the time to give it to them, reminding them of
materials of the right
the importance of reading it carefully.

Sometimes, workshop venues display posters to
advertise the event. The organisations responsible for
Those responsible for the logistic details liaise with
the event may have their own posters, banners or
the whole team to be aware of their needs and to
hoarding. If you do not have this material you can
ensure all the technical resources are in place, that
prepare a welcome poster which includes the name
materials are where they will be needed, that the
of the workshop, the dates and names of the bodies
conference room has everything in place14 and that
involved in setting up the event. Make this very visi-
they organise their work space.
ble, for example, display it at the entrance of the

workshop conference room.
It is important that the coordinator agrees with the
sponsoring organisations whether they will take part
13
See p. 54 Section 5.10.3 Organising a training workshop,

list of materials . . .
14 See p. 44 Section 5.6 Organising a training workshop, The
workshop venue

Usually the administration team at the workshop venue
5.9.
designates a person as your point of contact to arrange
Advice on
organisation
times, hiring services or other logistics; ideally, that

person should be present on this day to confirm the
Never lose your calm. Organising a workshop is

easier with a detailed plan of tasks and alternative
process of events.
solutions included in a plan B. We have never

come across a workshop that has gone 100 per
cent according to plan, so there will be changes
you did not expect, even with good planning.
The impression on the first day of

the workshop often determines
how the workshop will go; this is
why it is essential to pay great
attention and be objective to the
preparation of the day. The decision about
what to do should be consolidated the day
before the event begins. This way, the training
team, under the management of the
coordinator, prepares using the agenda and
script and puts the following in place:
materials, presentations, technical equipment,
workshop conference room, announcements,
contact with other people and social time; all
this depends on the type of workshop, the focus
of the training and the availability of
resources.
The preparations are in place, the preparation
stage of the training is complete and you know
exactly what to expect the next day; wherever
possible, avoid leaving preparation tasks for
the following day. Once this day is over be
sure to go away and rest without any tasks
outstanding or issues to resolve. And
remember the saying: dont leave until
tomorrow what you can do today. Success
awaits you . . . Sweet dreams!
Communicate: if in doubt, it is best to be sure

that something is being done rather than
assuming it will be done as expected. An extra
phone call to confirm something is better than
regrets after unpleasant surprises.
Be creative! If the budget does not stretch far

enough, you can always find an alternative
solution.
Remember the organisation does not stop once

the workshop begins. During the workshop you
need to check and double-check that things are
going according to plan. If necessary, the
programme or logistics can be adapted as
required keeping in mind which are the key
activities and which are the secondary ones.15
Remember the sayings: practise makes perfect,

nobody is born perfect and learn by
experience. Organising a workshop should be
approached as a learning process: if something
does not turn out well the first time, it is sure to
be better the next time. Once we have done
something, we will always see ways we could
have done it better. But to learn, we need to
have an open and self-critical approach.
15 See p. 27 Section 3.4, Conceptual Framework, Managing
time
51 / 204
52 / 204

5.10.
Templates to help with organisation
5.10.1.
Example of a work plan for organising a workshop
Work plan
Task
Person
responsible16
Time
required
Over what
Deadline before
period of time17 workshop17
First needs analysis

Define objectives
First contact with co-sponsoring bodies
Prepare budget
Election and undertakings of moderators
Establish the objectives according to
the needs analysis
Fix the theme according to the objectives
Draw up a preliminary programme and
methodological design
First contact with trainers
Select and visit workshop venue
Define the participant profile to make a
preliminary list (of who to invite)
Invite the organisations which the potential
participants are linked to
Definitive selection of training staff and their
undertaking to attend workshop
Formalise undertakings with training staff
Design the programme and methodology
Decide what equipment is required
and arrange it
Recruit and contract support team
Check results of the invitation and
chase if required
Enrol participant
Confirm participants enrolment
Final clarifications and agreements
with the venue
Confirm attendance of all the trainers and
moderators and send them all new information
(list of participants, etc)
Buy and arrange all workshop materials
Prepare the start of the workshop
Training team meeting
Coordinator
Coordinator
Coordinator
Coordinator
Coordinator
8 hours
4 hours
8 hours
16 hours
48 hours
1 week
1 week
2 weeks
1 week
2 weeks
6 months before
6 months before
6 months before
5 months before
5 months before
Coordinator and moderator

4 hours
2 hours
1 week
1 day
5 months before
5 months before

Coordinator
Coordinator
8 hours
24 hours
24 hours
1 day
1 month
1 month
5 months before
4-5 months before
3-5 months before
24 hours
2 weeks
4 months before
Coordinator
24 hours
1 week
3 months before

4 hours
Coordinator
24 hours
Coordinator, moderator and trainers 48 hours
1 day
2 weeks
1 month
3 months before
3 months before
2-3 months before
Coordinator
Coordinator
16 hours
24 hours
2 weeks
2 weeks
1-2 months before

1-2 months before
Coordinator
Coordinator
Coordinator
8 hours
6 hours
8 hours
1 week
1 week
2 days
6 weeks before
4 weeks before
3 weeks before
Coordinator
2 hours
1 day
3 weeks before
Coordinator
Coordinator
Coordinator with training team
Coordinator with training team
8 hours
36 hours
8 hours
3 hours
3 days
1-2 weeks
1-2 days
Afternoon before
the workshop
2 weeks before
3 days before
1-2 days before
Afternoon before
the workshop
16
17
The coordinator can delegate parts of these tasks and/or consult others to obtain the information.
Replace these entries according to the date of your workshop.

5.10.2.
Format of list of workshop venue requirements
List of workshop venue requirements
Large room for full sessions

metres squared
with natural daylight
no obstacles obstructing vision
appropriate temperature
suitable seats and light tables
2-5 additional rooms for group work.
Safe and quiet venue.
Easy and inexpensive for participants to get to.
Appropriate venue house rules
Flexible catering
Appropriate, good value food using local products
Comfortable and clean accommodation
Short distances between the main meeting room, the group work rooms, the dining room and accommodation
Public telephone, mobile or other means of communication and prepaid phone cards
Fax
Internet access for email
Photocopier
Equipment for the workshop:
Flipchart
Boards or screens
Overhead projector
Multimedia video projector
Projection screen
Slide projector.
Video camera, video player and television
53 / 204
54 / 204

5.10.3.
Format of materials list required for running a visual

participative workshop
List of materials required for

running a participative visual workshop
For a workshop of one week with 20-25 people, you will need:
between 10 and 15 boards or screens
2 rolls of sticky or masking tape
1 or 2 flipcharts
3 pairs of scissors
paper for the flipchart: about 5 to 10 sheets per day
1 stapler
1 hole punch
Kraft / brown paper: about 20 sheets per day
paperclips
pens and pencils
different coloured (pale)card:

1,200 rectangular (10 x 20.5 centimetres)
300 oval (11 x 19 centimetres)
50 rectangular (10 x 55 centimetres)
100 circular (some 14 centimetres diameter and others
notebooks
1 calculator
1 pack of printing paper
folders
photo storyboard materials
of 19.5)
acetates or transparencies
50 circular (9 centimetres diameter)
marker pens for writing on acetates or transparencies
20 in the shape of large clouds (25 x 42 centimetres)
sticky labels or similar for name badges

film and batteries for the camera
toys and sweets
pins/drawing pins: about 700 with large heads
first aid kit
4 to 5 pin cushions:
25 black marker pens (refillable)
200 sticky labels (19 millimetres) in different colours
12 blue, red and green marker pens

specific materials for the workshop theme
12 glue sticks
name plates or sticky labels
1-2 still cameras and possibly a video camera
a bell or whistle to help control the time
clock
gifts or prizes for competitions, raffles and activities

5.10.4.
55 / 204
Agenda
A Practical workshop on evaluation tools for an
effective management and carrying capacity in public areas
Otn Quimbaya Sanctuary, 18 to 24 November 2001
Day
Time
Sunday
18
Morning
Duration
Mid-day
Monday
19
Evening
07.30
08.30
Subject
Summary of proposed content
Participants arrive from

outside Cali.
Meet in WWF offices: Carrera 35 No 4A-25, Faizuly C, Andrs

Barrio San Fernando; tel: 558 2577
Trujillo Chaba
Travel from Cali to the

Sanctuary.
In three vehicles (WWF, La Red and a hired

vehicle). Those arriving at Pereira transfer to
Ecosueo (Calle 25 No 6-57; tel: 333 9955).
Naikoa,
Chaba and
Andrs
Arrive and settle in at the

Sanctuary.
Accommodation and welcome
Alejandra and representative from

the Sanctuary
Lunch
Introduction to the
Sanctuary flora and fauna.
1 hour
15 minutes
Dinner
Breakfast
Opening the workshop
Responsibility
Welcome and presentation by the Sanctuary Andrs Rivera

director, Andrs Rivera
Welcome participants. Introduction to the

Workshop, background and objectives
Method
In vehicles from:
WWF
La Red
hired
Presentation
Carmen Candelo Presentations

Ivonne Meja
Chaba
Carmen Candelo Group activity
8.45
75 minutes Participant introductions

(11/4 hours ) and expectations
Activity for participant introductions
10.00
30 minutes
Introduction to the
programme and
methodology
The agenda content, how each theme will be Carmen Candelo, Visual presentations
approached, workshop rules and announcing Naikoa Aguilar.
logistics. Gather expectations and compare
Faizuly Cern.
them with the workshop objectives and
content
10.30
10.45
15 minutes
120 minutes
(2 hours)
Coffee
Conceptualisation of
ecotourism
12.45
14.30
90 minutes
2 hours
Lunch
Ecotourism: background
and advances in the
political and legal arenas
16:30 p.m.
15 minutes
Coffee
Terms and respective meanings linked to the Alejandra

theme. Synthesis of related terms.
Romero
Distribution of materials
and Chaba
Presentation, group
and full session
work
The political and legal context of ecotourism Ivonne Meja

in Colombia and internationally. Contribution
of Colombian policy document on
Ecotourism in the country. Advances of
sustainable tourism in Colombia.
Presentation and
group work
56 / 204

Day
Duration
Subject
Responsibility
1 hour
Summary of
subjects
covered.
How are we going to continue to build

on and incorporate these concepts
and context within our institutions?
Carmen Candelo Group discussion
18.00
45 minutes
Preparation
for the next
day
Introduction to the training themes of

carrying capacity and permissible limits.
What are we going to do, how and why?
Presentation
Naikoa Aguilar
Carmen Candelo
18.45
15 minutes
Evaluation of the day
Time
Monday 19 16.45
19.00
Method
Dinner
Chaba and
Ivonne
Information
exchange - part 1
Tuesday 20 7.30
45 minutes
Breakfast
8.30
11/4 hours
Preliminary
visit to the
paths
10.00
15 minutes
Coffee
10.15
11/4 hours
11.30
Field trip along the paths as visitors would:

lianas and wetlands. Guided walk.
Naikoa, Andrs,
Sanctuary
guides
2 groups follow
2 routes along
2 paths.
Preliminary
visit to the paths
Field trip along the paths as visitors would:

lianas and wetlands. Guided walk.
Naikoa, Andrs,
Sanctuary
guides
2 groups follow
2 routes along
2 paths.
25 minutes
analysis of the route
The par ticipants comment on their

experiences during the field trip. Description
and general comments
Participants
Full session
12.00 noon
2 hours
Lunch
14.00
1 hour
Induction and
evaluation of
paths
How to use: a compass, measuring tape. How

to carry out an analytical review of paths
(physical and environmental conditions,
management and interpretation) and why it
needs to be done
Naikoa and
Andrs
Presentation and
mini-workshop
(the use of
instruments)
15:00 p.m.
2 hours
Practical
exercise:
measuring paths
Surveying and analysing paths. Each group to

study one of the selected paths in depth, as
an example of evaluation
Naikoa and
Andrs
Team work with

field guides, shared
responsibilities
17.00
15 minutes
Coffee
18.00
1 hour
Full session
covering the
days work
Each group presents its observations on the

work carried out so far and what factors it
considers relevant for the study of paths.
Following on from these presentations, the
groups can add elements to consider in their
analysis.
Naikoa and
Andrs.
Supported by
Luis A. Camargo
Whole group
discussion
15 minutes
Quick evaluation of the day
19.00
Carmen Candelo Full session
Dinner
Exchange, part 2
Exchange of information and materials among

participants.
Alejandra
and Miguel

Day
Duration
Subject
1 hour
Breakfast
31/2 hours
Measuring
and analysing
paths, continued.
12.00 noon
11/2 hours
Lunch
13.30
1 hour
Example of
calculating the
capacity
Example of normal calculation by CCF and Naikoa

CCRA using data gathered in previous survey
Presentation
14.30
2 hours
Practical
application exercise
With the data collected in the field, the

CCF and CCR of each of the Sanctuary
paths is calculated
Group work and

plenary
presentation
16.30
15 minutes
Coffee
17.00
11/2 hours
Analysis
15 minutes
Evaluation of the day
Time
Wednesday 07.30
21
08.30
Responsibility
Method
Conclude the survey and analysis of the paths.

Each group concludes the work by completing
a field form, writing an analysis report and
describing the condition of the path (critical
points, special management points) and an
interpretative analysis report on the paths.
Naikoa and
Andrs,
supported by
Luis A. Camargo
Plenary discussion.
Naikoa and
Andrs
Discussion of the results and the methodology Naikoa and

used. Participants express their opinions and Carmen
individual ideas on applying the methodology.
Individual reflection
and sharing analysis
with the whole
group
Dinner
19.00
Thursday
22
57 / 204
45 minutes
Working group
meeting
7.30
1 hour
Breakfast
8.30
1 hour
Introduction to the
management
effectiveness study
9.30
15 minutes
Coffee
9.45
21/4 hours
Research information
for the management
effectiveness study
12.00 noon
11/4 hours
Lunch
13.30
21/2 hours
Continue research
How are we going to continue?
Chaba, Ivonne
and Carmen
Theoretical methodological frameworks for Naikoa

calculating the effectiveness of management:
definition of range or areas and methods of
evaluation.
Presentation with
feedback
Based on the Gua del Anexo 1, find and Participants

analyse written information, carry out
interviews and use other means to obtain data
relevant to each of the points being evaluated
within the effectiveness management
framework.
4 working groups,
gathering
information from
primary and
secondary sources.
Based on the Gua del Anexo 1, find and Participants

analyse written information, carry out
interviews and use other means to obtain data
relevant to each of the points being evaluated
within the effectiveness management
framework.
4 working groups,
gathering
information from
primary and
secondary sources.
58 / 204

Day
Responsibility
Duration
Subject
16.00
15 minutes
Coffee
16.15
2 hours
Presentation of
the information
gathered
Presentation and discussion of the results: each Participants

group presents a brief summary of their findings
and their own preliminary analysis.
Group
presentations and
plenary discussion.
18.15
30 minutes
Where are we in terms

of the points analysed?
Which of the analysed points is the most

vulnerable in my organisation and why?
Individual reflection
and group
discussion
18.45
15 minutes
Quick evaluation of the day
19.00
Friday 23
Hora
Participants
Carmen Candelo
Dinner
07.30
45 minutes
Breakfast
08.15
2 hours
Analysis based on
the methodology
of effectiveness
management
10.15
15 minutes
Coffee
10.30
11/2 hours
Presentation of the results Each group proceeds to present the results Participants
obtained, following the data summary master.
At the end there is time for discussion
12.00 noon
11/2 hours
Lunch
13.30
2 hours
Management
Final calculations of the effective carrying Naikoa
Effectiveness (ME) and
capacity CCE of Otn Quimbaya Sanctuary
Effective Carrying Capacity flora and fauna
(CCE) of Otn Quimbaya
Sacntuary flora and fauna.
15.30
15 minutes
Coffee
Final conclusions
15.45
Using the analysis of the information gathered, Participants

each group evaluates each of the points
examined in Methodological Guidelines in
Appendix 2
19.00
Dinner
20.00
Surprise!
09.00
1 hour
Breakfast
Depart the Sanctuary
4 working groups
Presentation by
each group and full
session discussion
With the final grid

as a guide, build and
define the ME of
the area full
session.
Analysis and discussion of the methodologies Carmen Candelo Discussion in full

and results: application possibilities, projection,
session
strengths and weaknesses
Final evaluation and close
Saturday 24 08.00
Method
Chaba

5.10.5.
Template of invitation or announcement
Invitation
Organisations that are inviting
Programmes or projects taking part in the invitation
Name of the workshop

A short sentence that describes the workshop objective
Name of addressee
(an individual or open to various colleagues)
Dear friends,
We are pleased to invite you to the (name of workshop) workshop . . .
The purpose of the workshop and who it is aimed at . . .
Dates and venue:

Accommodation:
People responsible:
Content: (In broad terms and attach more information). Who covers the
costs and what the invitation includes . . . when and to whom is
confirmation sent (deadlines, by what means)?
Address of the organisation:

Yours faithfully,
Names of those responsible

Signature(s) (no signature if sent by email)
59 / 204
60 / 204

5.10.6.
Example of an announcement or invitation
WWF Colombia
Carrera 35 N 4A - 25
Barrio San Fernando
Santiago de Cali
Colombia
Tel + 57 (2) 558 25 77

Fax + 57 (2) 558 25 88
ccandelo @ wwf.org.co
wwfcol @ wwf.org.co
wwf.wwf.org.co
wwf.panda.org
18th July 2001

To whom it may concern
Fundacin CHONAPI
El Charco, Nario
Dear Sirs,
The World Wide Fund for Nature WWF Colombia, invites you to participate in the workshop
entitled Basic Cartographic Techniques as a Tool for Territorial Planning, which will take place in
Guapi, Cauca, from 12 to 18 August 2001. The event is aimed at people from institutions and
organisations linked to collective territory planning processes.
This event takes place within the framework of WWF Colombias objectives that focus on building
technical capacity and skills in knowledge and implementation of tools for making decisions in
planning processes for use and management of natural territory and resources. Within this framework
the specific objectives of the workshop are that the participants:
Develop skills and dexterity in the interpretation, acquisition and processing basic geographic
information, as a tool in the territorial planning processes.
Learn to recognise and interpret features on a map: sources, orienteering, descriptive information,
scale, coordinates, geographic characteristics, contour lines, etc.
Develop ability to manage equipment and methodologies for capturing primary information
required to produce maps.
Produce maps from primary information collected in the field and secondary information
gathered through consulting other available sources.
To achieve these objectives a participative methodology is used, that combines putting practical
exercises into practice and using equipment and tools to strengthen the theory sessions; furthermore,
we believe the exchanging of personal experiences between participants is important.
To complement the theory modules, we have requested the Consejo Communitario del Alto Guapi
for its cooperation and permission to carry out some practical field work on land under its jurisdiction
(collective territory). Permission has been approved and to carry this out we will have the logistical
support of CCR and SENA (Guapi offices) and possibly others pending confirmation.
-1-

WWF Colombia
Barrio San Fernando
Santiago de Cali
Colombia
Tel + 57 (2) 558 25 77

Fax + 57 (2) 558 25 88
wwfcol @ wwf.org.co
wwf.wwf.org.co
wwf.panda.org
It is intended that the workshop activities will enable participants to understand and build on
the experience of the Consejo Comunitario del Alto Guapi, in their territorial planning process.
Given the profile of the participants and organisations that we are inviting, we believe we may
be able to carry out other practical field work in the mangrove swamp area.
In line with the workshop objectives and considering the post-workshop application of what
is learned, we have decided on certain selection criteria for participants. We have outlined the
criteria below and hope you will consider these when deciding who should participate in the
event. The criteria are that participants must:
Belong to an institution or organisation and be involved in map making.
Be interested in and possess basic skills in managing these subjects.
Be educated to the equivalent of GCSE standard or failing that, possess basic literacy and
numeracy skills.
Have the ability to apply and replicate workshop learning in their working environment.
Be available to participate in the whole workshop five working days plus any travel time
required to get to and from Guapi.
Be open to learning new things and sharing with others in large groups.
With the aim of amending the thematic and methodological content of the workshop, and in
particular field work; it is important for us to obtain basic information from each person who
attends the workshop. We have therefore compiled the attached questionnaire entitled
Exchanging Experiences, (appendix 1) the completion of which is an essential part of enrolment.
To be able to attend the workshop, you need to send us confirmation of attendance along with
the completed form no later than 27 July 2001, by post to our Cali offices or by email to Rosa
Prez or Juan Pablo Casas:
Fax:
(0+2) 558 25 88
Emails: wwfg8@wwf.org.co / wwg6@wwf.org.co
WWF Colombia will cover the cost of enrolment, transport, accommodation and food for each
-2-
61 / 204
62 / 204

WWF Colombia
Barrio San Fernando
Santiago de Cali
Colombia
Tel + 57 (2) 558 25 77

Fax + 57 (2) 558 25 88
wwfcol @ wwf.org.co
wwf.wwf.org.co
wwf.panda.org
participant (one per organisation or institution). People who are coming from other areas will
join the group in Cali from where the whole group will transfer to Guapi. Please indicate in
Appendix 1 the day and time of your arrival in Cali, to enable us to coordinate the transfer and
to link with the respective itinerary. For those who confirm their attendance, please be punctual,
as additional transfer costs outside those planned will not be met nor will telephone call
charges.
We request that participants and organisations that have equipment and mapmaking materials
which might be useful in the workshop, bring them to the workshop. The following is a list of
items required:
Compass
Mapmakers ruler (pyramid-shaped precision ruler with multi-scales)
Protractor
Field notebook (topographical folder)
Graph paper (millimetre scale)
Rulers
You will need working clothes for a warm climate, cap and hat, torch and replacement batteries,
flask or similar to carry liquids, waterproofs, waterproof rubber boots, camera and film if you
wish, a rucksack for field work and personal toiletries.
We will send you the workshop agenda and additional information nearer the time.
Yours faithfully,
Signature (s)
Name (s)
Position (s)
-3-

5.10.7.
Template confirmation
Participation confirmation
Projects that are part of the invitation

Date and where the workshop will take will place
First name and last name:

Organisation:
Address:
Telephone/Fax:
Email:
If a payment is required, indicate the amount, how to pay (for example, the name of the bank, account
number and type of account current account, savings account, etc ) the name the account is in and if this
payment has a special reference. Include details of discounts for early payment or any other reason (teachers,
students, teaching assistants, etc).
Indicate to the participant how the receipt of payment should be sent, to what address and to whom it
should be addressed. Also include, the postal address, telephone and fax numbers and email addresses of
those organising the workshop. Mention how you will confirm receipt of this information and whether
their enrolment on the workshop has been approved.
Include additional information about the venue, the hotel and other places of interest.
Address to which any interested parties might write to clarify concerns or request more information.
Names and titles of those responsible for the workshop.
63 / 204
64 / 204

5.10.8.
Template of a preliminary survey
Preliminary survey
Projects that are part of the invitation

Date and location of the workshop
General information
Please provide the information requested below:
First name and last name:

Organisation:
Address:
Telephone/Fax:
Email:
Evaluation:
Using a questionnaire, ask the person interested in participating in your workshop for the
following information in detail (one way to do this could be by asking questions):
Whether the subject or some elements of the proposed training workshop are used in
the persons workplace.
Which of the aspects of the theme does he/she find easy to do and which are more
difficult?
What have been the main aims in applying the theme in his/her work?
Whether in recent years the individual has worked with the theme and what ideas does
he/she have in this respect?
With whom, inside or outside the organisation, does he/she liaise regarding this theme?
Whether in the past the individual has taken part in training processes on the theme and
which areas were the most complex?
What are the main challenges facing the organisation where he/she works with regards
applying the theme the workshop focuses on?
What suggestions does the potential participant or organisation have regarding the
workshop?
Include the name of the person to whom the information should be sent: address, telephone,
fax, email, deadline for sending information.

5.10.9.
Example of preliminary survey
Preliminary Survey of Experience in the

Field of Cartography
As the name indicates, the purpose of this form is to provide an opportunity for sharing personal
experiences in the field of study, especially those relating to the basic essentials of cartography, with
all the participants. With the information recorded here, they will share tools, instruments and procedures
that will serve to review work and gain new knowledge for producing work material.
In the field of environmental management this process is useful for:
Recognising and integrating practical processes similar to or different from your own.
Building on the existing experiences and processes.
Comparative assessment of experiences with similar characteristics within a process.
Gathering information.
Systemise experiences.
Systems Record
Name of participant
Name of the institution or organisation represented
Name of experience(s) in cartography in which the individual has participated or participates
Where the experience is taking/took place (give a brief description of the circumstances)
65 / 204
66 / 204

Objectives that have been set during the work
Beneficiaries (group of people that benefits and how it benefits from your work)
What is the work methodology? What procedures and tools are you using?
What are the results you are reaching?
Obstacles/Difficulties
How have they been resolved?

Lessons learned: brief description of the conclusions of the experience
Future plans following on from the experience
What material can you bring to present and share in the information arena?
Additional Information
Specify what means of transport you will use to get to the workshop:
To Cali
To Guapi
Method of transport:
Day:
Time:
Contact details of the organisation you represent:

Address:
Telephone:
E. mail:
Fax:
67 / 204
68 / 204

5.10.10. Budgeting
Form
Budget
Item
Professional Fees
1
2
3
4
5.
Professional Fees Subtotal
Accommodation
Accommodation Subtotal
Food
Breakfast
Lunch
Dinner
Refreshments
Other
Food Subtotal
Flights
Route 1
Route 2
Route 3
Route 4
Flights subtotal
Overland Transport
Route 1
Route 2
Route 3
Overland Transport subtotal
Stationery and photocopying

20 sheets of paper
1 roll of masking tape
Photocopies
Storyboard production
Stationery Subtotal
Other
Unexpected expenses
Other Subtotal
Total expenses
Date and where it will take place
Numer of
people
Number
of days
Unit cost
Subtotal
Total cost
FirstNombres
and last names
y apellidos
Directory
Nombre dename
la
Organisation
organizacin
Position
Cargo enwithin
la
organisation
organizacin
Direccin
y lugar
Address
de procedencia
Telfono
Telephone
/ Fax
/ Fax
Correo
Email
electrnico
Date and where it will take place

5.10.11. Directory
Template
69 / 204
70 / 204

ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Implementing the workshop

6.
Implementing the
workshop
mplementing the workshop is putting into practice
what was envisaged and considered during the
conception stage of the workshop and what you
planned and prepared in the organisation phase. In

this chapter we will explain in detail the different tasks
for the different stages of the implementation of the
workshop:
Greet and welcome everyone.

Present the event in the specific context and background of the workshop.
Extend thanks to the organisations that made the
event possible.
Introduce the training team and explain what their
The workshop induction

The running order of the days
The workshop closing session
roles are.
Depending on the type of training, the inauguration
will be led by the coordinator or a representative of
one of the organisations responsible for the event. The
main points of this session can be displayed visually.
The points presented here should be adapted depending

on the type of training, the subject, the duration and
the number and profile of participants, etc.
This process lasts between 15 and 30 minutes.

6.1.2. Presenting
the objectives
The objectives, derived from the needs analysis, act as

6.1.
The workshop induction
The first sessions determine the success of the whole

workshop, because they are decisive in terms of group
bonding and learning. This is why the time and care
invested in these sessions are well spent.
The different points of the induction should inform
the participant about the background, objectives,
content, programme, rules and the methodological
focus. It is also a time for people to get to know each
other and to begin building a sense of trust in the
group. It is important therefore, that the training team
attends the induction phase.
the guide for the direction the workshop takes.

Presenting the objectives allows the participants to settle
themselves into the workshop from the beginning; you
should therefore allow time for questions and then
have the objectives on permanent display throughout
the workshop so they will be remembered as the
workshop progresses.
6.1.3. Presenting
the general programme
The workshop programme provides an overview of

the total content of the event. A member of the team
presents the themes for the different sessions, including
extracurricular activities. Make it clear how flexible the
programme is to what extent the programme can be
altered to respond to circumstances that arise during
6.1.1. Inauguration
the workshop. This programme and the adjustments
Most workshops open with a short and relatively for-
should be displayed on screen and permanently on
mal speech:
view throughout the entire workshop.
71 / 204
72 / 204

6.1.4. Introducing
the participants
Participation: How work is going to be approached
The next stage is participant introductions so they begin
set out the principles, criteria and elements of the
to mix and break the ice. The introduction activity
participative focus.
you choose depends on the type of workshop, the

theme, the objectives, the duration, the venue, the
Visualisation: The importance of visual presentation
available learning resources, the size and make-up of
during the workshop, the procedures this implies and
the group, the levels of education, the profile of the
the recommendations that need to be followed, for
participants and whether the participants have met
example, rules for writing on the cards.2 Discuss the
previously.1 The characteristics of the tools chosen will
compilation of a photographic record if you are going
determine the integration and harmony of the group
to do one this recording method frees the participants
from this moment on.
of the task of note-taking during the workshop.3
Be clear about what information each participant needs
Outline for each day: Although there will be an agen-
to know. We suggest you combine technical information
da for each day, it is worth explaining the outline or
with professional details. For example:
general process that will guide each working day.4
Personal details, such as name, where someone is
Shared responsibility: If the type of workshop is set
from, age, marital status, qualifications, interests.
up in this way, each member of the training team knows
Professional information, such as organisation,
their responsibilities the coordinator, the moderator,
position, responsibilities, experience, skills.
the trainer, the support team and the relationship they
Other information, such as each participants reason
have with the participants and with the development
for attending the workshop, aspirations, likes, dislikes
of the methodology. You may find it helpful to draw
or preferences, etc.
up an explanatory diagram. Suggest creating support

groups with the objective of creating a sense of
The outcomes are put on permanent display to help
collaboration and participation in the development of
everyone get to know each other. We also suggest that
the workshop and to receive feedback and
each participant and member of the training team has
recommendations that guide the implementation of the
their name (and other information if necessary) on
workshop. The different groups can take responsibility
their lapel.
for feedback about the content and methodology, help

manage time, logistics and assist in maintaining a good
6.1.5. Presenting
the methodological focus
atmosphere within the group.
The methodological focus is a combination of the

criteria, the concepts and the tools used to run the
workshop. The learning design carefully chosen and
prepared is presented, discussed, added to and agreed
with the group of participants.
The different components of the methodological focus

should be understood by everyone:
3
4
See p 121-130, Section 8.3 The tool box

See p 108, Section 8.2 The tool box, Recommendations
for writing on the cards
See p 78, Section 6.5, Implementing the workshop, The
photographic record
See p 38, Section 4.2.4 The training workshop, Structure
of a workshop day

Ongoing evaluation: Present and explain the tools
expectations, etc it is worth agreeing a code of conduct
you have selected for the continuous evaluation of the
for the group; this is what we call the rules of the
workshop, for example, the
moodometer.5
Advise
game.
from the outset that the evaluation will be an important

ongoing activity to feedback to the group.
To decide on rules that everyone agrees to follow, it is

worth asking the following questions:
Other areas of interest specific to each workshop.

6.1.6. Expectations
What do we do to ensure this

workshop meets the objectives?
and fears analysis
What do we need to avoid so that the

workshop meets the objectives?
Each participant will arrive at the workshop with his

or her own ideas, expectations and fears which will
not necessarily match the workshop programme
How should the workshop run so

that you learn?
although the information provided before the workshop

was considered adequate. Once you are aware of these
What do I undertake to do so that

the training runs as it should?
expectations and fears you will, if possible, be able to

integrate them into the training objectives.
Ask the participants to explain their expectations
The agreements together with the actual rules of the
what they expect from the workshop and their fears
venue where the workshop takes place should remain
and concerns about it. Compare the expectations with
on view so that, if necessary, they can be added to or
the objectives and quickly analyse the implications of
participants can be reminded of them. We suggest that
the fears to establish how you can allay them these
the trainer avoids proposing rules, with the sole
are alarm signals and it is best to respond to them
exception of signs that will help manage time.6
early in the proceedings so that they do not interfere

with the development of the training later on. We
If, as the process progresses, the need arises to add
recommend two basic ways of collecting this
another rule, it should be agreed with the whole group,
information:
which after all, is who decides on the agreements and

the rules of the game.7
The participants write on cards.

The trainer listens to the participants and enters their
comments, in an orderly manner, on a board.
6.1.8. Other
There may be other elements that are appropriate to

include in the workshop induction, such as information
This information remains on permanent display
about local facilities, praying time, welcome drinks,
throughout the workshop and will be of enormous
etc.
importance during the evaluation.

6.1.7. Agreements
and rules of the game
5
6
So that the workshop can develop within the

aforementioned
parameters
methodology,
participation, visualisation, objectives, time,
See p. 163-167, Chapter 8, The tool box

See p. 82, Section 6.6, Implementing the workshop,
Examples of signs for managing time
See p. 82, Section 6.6, Implementing the workshop, List
of possible rules of the game
73 / 204
74 / 204

Team members and roles

in the training workshop
responsible for the overall

logistics and development
Coordinator
build on
knowledge and
skills
deliver the
content
active
participation
Participants
Trainers
exchange
of:
exchange
of:
Experiencies
Feedback
Contacts
Interactive
learning
Experiences
Contacts
Invited
expert
trainers
Moderators
deliver the
workshop
advise the trainers and
participants on the
methodology
exchange
of:
build on
knowledge
exchange
of:
Support
team
members
Experiencies
Contacts
ensure the logistics are in place
Experiencies
Contacts
6.2.
The running order of the days
the day, for example, mealtimes or transport, etc.8 It

also confirms the signs for controlling time between
6.2.1. Daily
preparation
the training team, in particular with the guest trainers.
Before starting each day, the trainers should ensure

that the technical equipment is available and in good
6.2.2. The
opening session of each day
working order and that the training and presentation
The day should begin by announcing the agenda and
material listed in the script are available. The script

may have been amended to meet the requirements of
the day and serves as a guide to the logistic needs of
See p. 86, Section 7.5, The training team, The script

6.2.3. Introduction
to the work sessions
The moderator opens the session, introduces the trainer,

announces the subject linking it with the other
workshop themes and hands over to the trainer.
Sometimes the person who opens the session may
also be the one responsible for explaining it.
Linking the theme with the participants needs and the
way the theme is developed is a crucial part of the
initial introduction to the session.
6.2.4. Explaining
the content
Each theme is explained with a selection of tools that

stimulate thinking, encourage participation and foster
learning.10 Keep in mind the following criteria when
selecting the most appropriate tools:
The subject content.
how much time will be spent on each activity, in line
with the required adjustments. Immediately after this,
inform the group of any logistical or technical
information relating to the workshop, for example,
administrative information, field trip requirements, etc.
The number and education level of the participants.

The time available.
The cultural background of the participants.
The workshop venue.
Next, introduce the daily committee or other feedback

mechanism you have in place, or review the position
with the on-going evaluations, for example, the
moodometer.9
It is essential that you clarify the purpose of the day
and the advances made the previous day in terms of
training. This process should not take more than 15
minutes.
The availability of equipment and materials.

The technical knowledge of how to use equipment.
The local workshop logistics.
A theme can be addressed, for example, by starting
with a lecture, then a discussion on the lecture, followed
by focussing on certain aspects of the theme in working
groups, on which the groups then make a visual
presentation to the whole group. Finally, conclude by
bringing all the results together.
9
10
See p. 163 & 164, Chapter 8, The tool box, The daily
committee and the moodometer
See p. 112, Section 8.2.1, The tool box, presentation
tools
The same theme could be approached by beginning

with a group conceptual debate; then, using the
contributions made, develop the theme, moving on to
75 / 204
76 / 204

the preparation of a visit in small groups to gather
Occasionally, with the enthusiasm to study a theme in
information about the theme or carry out a practical
depth, the participants might take on the responsibility
exercise. After the visit has taken place, the groups
of extending the working day. This should not,
organise and analyse the information, then discuss and
however, interfere with the general programme and
present these results to the whole group.
free time. There are occasions when this can be easily

managed, for example, do not take time to respond to
The concepts can be built on using teaching materials,
questions which will be answered under a different
which are suitable for handling themes they should
theme later in the workshop. If necessary, refer to the
be distributed in advance or when the introduction is
rules of the game agreed at the start to control time
made.11
and the participants conduct.
Make sure you have photocopied and handed
out additional documents.

6.2.5. The
closing session of each day
The training team should ensure the main theme runs
The day should end with a brief evaluation.12 Include
through the content, making summaries and linking
the start time for the next day and any outstanding
the different themes so the workshop is experienced
logistical information.
as a coherent and meaningful whole. The team should

also ensure that the concepts and procedures are clear
and understood by the participants before moving on
6.3.
The workshop closing session
to another theme. It is worthwhile therefore, to make

sure that the process and results are on display.
The journey is coming to an end: the period of learning

and fellowship is coming to a close and many emotions
To make a concise conclusion, the trainers should pay
will have been experienced. So that everything remains
attention to the ideas that the group produces, integrate
linked and everyone goes home with a feeling of
them into the theme and organise all the information
satisfaction, it is important to close the workshop well.
in a diagram or chart. If possible, any light-hearted or
This can be achieved by taking the following steps:
humorous moments could be included in the summary.

6.3.1. The
summary
Managing the time allocated for each activity is a task
The training team should carry out a summary covering
that deserves careful attention. Any significant changes
the range of thematic content in the workshop as a
should be discussed and agreed with the participants.
whole, remembering to include anecdotes relating to

the learning and highlighting contributions made by
participants at different times and during workshop
activities. The summary will allow the group to review
the work undertaken, the advances made and the
results reached. It also reinforces the group feeling,
which is important when it comes to undertaking the
11
12
See p. 110, Section, The tool box, Teaching materials

See p. 163-167, Section 8, The tool box, Evaluations

responsibilities that the members of the group may
also be prepared to consider the opinions and use
have when they return to their place of work.
the feedback to improve and perfect their training

package.
6.3.2. Undertakings
Usually, the training workshop is not the end, but part
There are different tools that can be combined to
of a process. The workshop should end therefore, with
evaluate the workshop.14 This evaluation process can
a series of undertakings and responsibilities which will
be anonymous, to encourage freedom of critical
lay the foundation for continuing the learning process.
expression by the participants.
Remember that the reason for the training is to put

The final evaluation should take place immediately
into practice what has been learned.
after the workshop, making it as comprehensive as

The training team agrees how to summarise, document
possible and including the initial proposals and
and specify the undertakings for continuation. For
agreements. The areas of the workshop to evaluate
example, design a template programme in which some
could be:
of the following questions are included:
The design.
What am I agreeing to do?
Meeting expectations.
Why do I want to do it?
Complying with the rules of the game.
How can I do it?
Overcoming fears.
When can I do it?
Relevance of the content.
With whom or for whom?
Suitability of what was learned.
What do I need?
Meeting objectives.
What do I hope to achieve?

What difficulties might I have?
6.3.3. Workshop
The style and abilities of the trainers.

13
evaluation
The quantitative and qualitative assessment of how

the workshop went generates criticisms that help to
improve and strengthen the proposals for future
workshops. The evaluation is therefore a necessary
learning exercise which should be undertaken
objectively and in a relaxed and open setting. It is
worth getting the message across that the participants
opinions are important and relevant. The training team
should have an open approach to this, to allow them
The methodological process and relevance to the

workshop.
The participants level of learning.
The level of exchange and interaction.
The level of enjoyment.
The different logistical areas (materials,
accommodation, food, etc). You can also collect
messages that participants may wish to send to their
colleagues and to the organisers.
to accept the criticisms, compliments and

recommendations that are put forward. They should
13-14
See p. 158-160; 163-167, Chapter 8, The tool box
77 / 204
78 / 204

In the final evaluation you can also include the results
6.4.
Workshop handouts
from the daily evaluations and the moodometer. The

time spent on the evaluation depends on the length of
These are a summary of what happened in the
the event and the type of workshop. For a workshop
workshop. Their purpose is to act as a guide and a
lasting a week, it would be appropriate to spend two
source for any future stage or experience. They also:
hours on the evaluation; for a one-day workshop, spend

about 30 minutes; for an event of three hours, you can
Help to keep the information in order.
spend five minutes.
Help to record the contents and processes.

Record the results and undertakings.
6.3.4. The
farewell and close
The farewell is subject to a number of criteria, including

time, the proximity of certain places and the availability
Provide information for reports and make the

dissemination of what took place easier.
of economic resources. It could be a dinner or drinks
Once you have established that there will be
offered by one of the sponsors of the event. The
handouts, the participants are then relieved of the
farewell should include presenting certificates to the
burden of taking notes and their concentration is
participants, which should be designed and made
free to be focused on participating.
available prior to this event.

The workshop handouts can be produced in different
6.3.5. After
the farewell
Although the journey has ended, the training team still

has outstanding business to attend to; for example,
ways: minutes, notes, graphic and virtual records, video, etc. From past experience, which is quite varied,
the photographic record has given excellent results.
putting their own work in order, thanking the staff at

the workshop venue, settling accounts and returning
equipment. The team will need to have their own final meeting so they can
5.5.
The photographic record

6.5.1.
What is it?
have a final evaluation of the
The photographic record is
workshop and submit
a chronological graphic
suggestions
account of the workshop. Its
and
recommendations for the

future. The team must also
ensure that the content of
the documentation is complete and in order.
purpose is to:
Record the thematic
content in a way that may
support integration activities
or replicate the workshop.
To provide follow-up to the

workshop, you should
choose one of the options
previously explained.15
15
See p. 39, Section 4.2.4,The

training workshop, Defining
the follow-up

It can also be understood by someone who has not
You should therefore, consider alternative and more
attended the workshop.
economic ways of creating a record of the workshop.
It systematically orders and helps one remember
For example, digital video that requires equipment
the workshop content and process.

It records the results and confirms the proposed
undertakings for the follow-up phase.
It provides a basis for continuity of the training,
such a camera and computer or only taking

photographs of the most important posters or display
boards and transcribe the others or leave the
photographs out all together.
should the workshop be part of a larger training

process.
6.5.2. Who
is responsible?
It complements or replaces other reports.
It is best if the person responsible for the photographic
It also depicts social occasions and light hearted
record is a member of the training team. This person
sessions during the workshop.
should take the pictures and begin to organise the

document itself. Tasks can be shared between a number
The photographic record is made up of text,
of people, but it is crucial that:
photocopies of presentations and photographs of the

posters or displays produced during the event; however,
The person responsible for taking the photographs
the photographs of the participants in the presentation
should know how to use the camera and have a
sessions, at work and at break times, add a softer
basic understanding of how to take photographs.
dimension to the document. The images that
For example, they should understand the effect on
accompany the text explain the content and link some
photographs of taking them against the light and
with others, in such a way that together they provide
know how to focus the content in the frame, etc.
an understanding of the content and overall process

of the workshop.
The person responsible for putting together the

photographic record needs to have attended all the
The photographic record, as we have just described,
workshop sessions and followed the process in order
requires a high level of investment of time and materials.
to document it.
79 / 204
80 / 204

6.5.3. How
is it produced?
As we have suggested, some display boards can be
Once the board is prepared and organised, number
transcribed when their content is relevant and lends
and label it. We recommend that you create a separate
itself to this. For example, when the content might help
number for each day.
to continue group work, when it deals with the results

of a planning session or when it is a template, etc.
Then organise the cards for the display board so

that they can all be read do not overlap them. Take
From the best quality photographs, chose the ones
the photograph of the display board and put a mark
that record the most representative moments of the
on the board to indicate that the photograph has been
workshop.
taken.
If necessary, re-take the photographs that are not
Attach the cards with glue and then look after the
clear and include them once you have been developed.
display boards carefully. As the display boards have

the date on them and are numbered, it will be very
easy to quickly find the board you are looking for and
re-take the photograph if necessary so that the content
of the cards can be read clearly.
Cut down the selected photographs so that you keep

what is truly relevant and to save space. Glue them in
chronological order to numbered pages. Use some of
the pages for a written description of the processes or
for a montage of parts of photographs; do not be afraid
Take at least one photograph of each presentation.
of being creative. If possible, give each page a heading
Take photographs of different moments in the
that includes the name of the event, the place and the
workshop, such as working groups, full sessions,
date.
excursions or field trips,

Write some relevant text for
activities and parties, but do
each
not take too many: remember
photograph,
remembering to maintain a
it is an expensive process16 .
sequential order. As the

Organise the document in
workshop progresses look
a file or folder, keeping the
out for important comments
contents in a daily section and
and sentences that can be
theme order. It is important
included here.
to check and see if there is a

Select materials that you
good group photograph. If
would like to include in the
there is not, you have time
document, for example, the
to choose a suitable moment
workshop programme, the list
and place to take one.
of participants, learning materials, photocopies of

Once the film is finished, label it and have it
acetates used in presentations, etc.
developed as soon as possible.

If you begin creating the photographic record during
the workshop, the participants and the training team
16
Translators Note: Consider digital photography as

an alternative.
will be able to contribute ideas and help if you have

any doubts.

Review and organise the whole document. If you
first impression the participants receive and it sets the
have any doubts, consult the programme and agendas
standard for the rest of the event. Therefore the training
for each day. This way you will have the framework
equipment should be as well prepared as possible.
for the photographic record.

The expectations and fears should be clear and used
It is advisable to complete the photographic record
as near to the end of the workshop as possible; if you
do not, you will begin to forget the events and lose
as points of reference in the permanent preparation of

the development of the workshop, in the evaluations
and in the proposals for the follow-up.
interest in the task. It is important not to loose

momentum. Treat it as an A or B activity and never
let it drop to it a W activity.
6.5.4. How
to reproduce and distribute
Once you are sure you have completed the whole

document, you can go on to the reproduction that
may involve photocopying, scanning or printing the
master photographic record document. Even though
the photographs might be in colour, the copies can be
in black and white. If this is the case, we suggest that
the cover and some of the special pages are in colour,
which will make the document more reader-friendly.
Use the same format and sizes, print on both sides of
the paper and use a strong, flexible and economical
binding.
The training team is responsible for maintaining the

methodological dynamic but needs to apply it within
reason to avoid making each activity a too rigid. If it
becomes apparent that a tool is not appropriate, you
If you scan the photographic record, you can save it

to disk or send it to the participants by email. Be aware
should listen to peoples opinions, consider them and

take flexible and appropriate decisions.
that this type of document requires a lot of computer

memory. We suggest you send the printed
reproductions by normal post.
The workshop is an opportunity for learning, exchange

and long-term growth. The training team should
therefore be aware of the new ideas and products that
Look into the cost implications before deciding which

reproduction technique you will use.
come out of the workshop (such as diagnostics, work

plans, documents, educational materials and new
procedures) in such a way that they can incorporate
6.6.
Recommendations for the

implementation of the workshop
them into that workshop or future events. Thus the

training team can update and improve its own materials
and content for the follow-up that might take place
after this workshop and for future events.
The first day and the start of the workshop are very
important for the rest of the training because it is the
81 / 204
82 / 204

Possible game rules list

Respect agreed timetables.
Respect the time allocated to each task or
presentation.
Keep contributions brief and avoid monologues.
Examples of signs for managing

time
These are some examples of time boards or signs
that you can make with cards used for displays, a
strip of light wood and glue. We put forward the
idea; you choose the symbols that you feel are most
suitable for the group and for the occasion.
Focus on the subject in hand.

Be specific.
Learn to listen.
Avoid unnecessary debates.
Clarify doubts.
Share experiences.
Take an active part in proceedings.
Every idea counts.
Do not ridicule anybody.
Keep to the group you are assigned to.
Complete the tasks assigned to the group.
5 minutes
remaining!
3 minutes
remaining!
Time up!
Respect the break times.

Respect agreements.
Behave in an orderly manner in the group work
rooms and take care of materials.
Speak for yourself.
Turn off mobile telephones.
Respect the rules of the venue and
accommodation.
Do not smoke in closed areas.
3 minutes
remaining!
Start
rounding
up!
2 minutes
remaining!
Time up!
Conclude!
Time up
sound
turned off!
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / The training team

The training
team
7.
Introduction
7.1
The support people: assist the above persons with the

logistics.
n this chapter we are going to talk about the different

roles and functions that exist in a training workshop.
We will do this as though there is a person for each
7.3.
Composition of the team
function, in order to clarify the characteristics, tasks

and responsibilities of the different roles. Some
The people making up the training team will be selected
workshops may have at least one person per role. In
depending on the number and profile of the participants
others there will be people taking on several roles.
and the budget. The selection will take account of the
The important thing is that the different activities are
following criteria:
executed adequately so that the workshop is a success.

It is essential that the person taking on a number of
The content of the workshop: those making up the
roles is always clear about which role he or she is
training team must have a general knowledge of the
assuming at any one time and how to act according to
thematic content, but it is essential that there is one
that role; this should also be clear to the participants.
person who has an in-depth knowledge of each theme.
The methodological focus of the workshop: the

7.2.
Roles within a
training team
The training focus we propose functions with a team
people making up the team must have experience of

this training focus and of managing the tools for it.
The ability of individuals to work as a team.
that has the following roles:
The time available: it is preferable that those making

The coordinator: organises the workshop, guarantees
up the training team should be present one day before
its logistics and is responsible for the team.
the workshop and stay up to one day afterwards; in

this way they will carry out the corresponding tasks
The moderator: is in charge of the methodology and
together. If this is not possible, at least one person
the focal thread of the workshop.
must carry out the necessary tasks after the workshop.
The trainer: is responsible for the thematic content of
Each trainer has his own training style and personal
the workshop.
characteristics. Therefore, a balance must be sought
83 / 204
84 / 204

within the team so that the participants can identify
sessions. As we have said, the possibility of holding
with the trainers. We have had positive experience
one or more preliminary meetings is dependent on
when the training team has been as balanced as
the budget.
possible with regard to:

The meeting a day before the workshop. This is
Gender: as many men as women.
essential for the training team to plan and organise the

workshop sessions in detail and to allocate
Age: people of different ages to balance experiences
responsibilities for the work groups. The training team
and attitudes that may be age-related.
agrees its rules and procedures, such as time

management and the rules of the game for sessions,
Cultural background: in intercultural workshops it
when and where to hold the daily evaluation meetings
is desirable to have persons from different cultural
and the preparation for successive days, how to
backgrounds.
organise their meeting room and what support needs

they have. If the team members do not know each
Language: it is essential that everyone has a good
other beforehand, it is advisable to devote the necessary
command of the language of the workshop. If this is
time and space to the process of team building. This
not feasible it may be possible to work with interpreters:
meeting ends with preparation of the sessions for the
for example, for foreign or indigenous languages,
first day and the organisation of the room for the
although this increases the cost and reduces the
workshop.
dynamic of the workshop.

Daily feedback sessions held at the end of each
Nevertheless, a balance must be sought between the
working day. In these meetings the training team
heterogeneity of the team and compliance with all these
comments on and evaluates what has taken place,
requirements in order to achieve a well-integrated team.
analyses the training focus, modifications and

adjustments to the schedule and workshop timetable
for the following day, while maintaining its focus on
7.4.
Performance of the
training team
the desired objectives and results. These meetings

can also be used to improve the trainers skills: receipt
of feedback and recommendations from their
Running a workshop requires the training team to work
colleagues helps them to progressively improve their
well as a group. It is important that there is a spirit of
performance.
cooperation and trust as well as knowledge and

agreement in relation to the conceptual and
A post-workshop meeting to evaluate the training
methodological focus. For the training team to function
and the functioning of the team, in which the steps to
well, the following is required:
be taken for the follow-up are also defined.
A phase of preparation before the workshop, in
The members of the training team who know about
which the indviduals meet as a group; they analyse
the content, the tools and how to coordinate can rotate
and discuss a preliminary programme that will be
their roles in the sessions. These changes can be
adapted, and agree how to carry out the workshop
elements in the design of the presentation of

the workshop. There are other teams in which only
forward 30 minutes. He asks Daniel, one of the support
one person has in-depth knowledge of the content; in
people, to put more visualisation material in the
such cases, that person will take on the role of trainer
workspaces and reminds Susana, the other support
in all the sessions where new material is being
person, that she must not only work on the
presented.
photographic record, but also collect the expert invited

for the afternoon session, Dr. Nuria, from the airport.
It is important that at any specific moment during the
In the meeting room, Olga gives instructions for the
workshop each member of the team only has one
group work, divides the group up and assigns tasks
function, which must be clear to the other team
and workspaces for each team. Patricia reminders
members and to the participants. Covering all functions
everyone of the recommendations for group working
is a priority. The exact distribution of the functions
that were agreed among the participants. She asks if
derives largely from the individual skills of each person.
everyone knows what to do. After the refreshment
The most important element here, is mutual support,
break, when the groups are working, Olga makes the
that is, all the team members should feel a part of and
relevant recommendations. Meanwhile, Patricia greets
be responsible for the process and the results.
Dr. Nuria and they discuss her presentation about waste

water monitoring; although Dr. Nuria has a lot of
If a specific theme cannot be covered by the members
experience as a university professor and consultant to
of the team, an expert can be invited. This person
environmental bodies, she admits she knows little about
must be informed in good time and must be integrated
participatory tools. Patricia tells her how the morning
into the team for the time that they are in the
session has gone and advises her of the groups level
workshop.
of knowledge about monitoring. The survey has shown

that the level is lower than indicated in the participants
Example (part one)
questionnaires. Therefore she suggests to Dr. Nuria
Let us imagine the following situation in a workshop:
that she starts by summing up the concept of waste
We are in a session in which the trainer is supplying
water monitoring.
teaching materials to be used later in a work group

session. Patricia, as moderator, starts the session by
You may have taken part in workshops in which the
explaining where the theme fits into the framework of
team comprises fewer people. This is possible,
the workshop, and how that section is going to proceed.
however, our experience shows that a workshop runs
She hands over to Olga, who as trainer covers the
better, with far fewer irritations and less improvisation,
theme of environmental monitoring. Firstly she carries
if there is one person per function in a well-integrated
out a survey of the participants experiences, asking
team. This is not only an advantage in the planning,
them what monitoring is used for. Patricia helps her
when two pairs of eyes see better than one, but also
with the visualisation and guides the discussion that
during every phase of the workshop.
follows. Next, Olga completes the picture by providing

suggested at the survey stage. In the meantime, Luis,
Example (part two)

If Luis had not only been the coordinator but also the
the coordinator, checks that the group work areas are
trainer, the coffee would have gone cold because the
ready and, as he realises that the session is running a
refreshment break was taken later; the groups would
little late, asks the caterers to put the refreshment break
not have found the space as well prepared because
theoretical and practical guidelines that were not
85 / 204
86 / 204
the coordinator would not have had the opportunity
7.5.
The workshop timetable
to give instructions to Daniel; Dr. Nuria, the expert on

the subject of monitoring, may have arrived late and a
So that each team member can be located at all times
bit flustered for the work session because she may not
together with their tasks and role, it is desirable to
have found the workshop venue; and, in addition, she
draw up a timetable for each day of the workshop.
would not have been able to make the final adaptations
The timetable is a standardised summary of how the
to her teaching materials with the support of the
day will proceed, defining the time, subject matter,
moderator.
tools, person responsible and materials required.
Example of a workshop timetable

Title: Environmental management workshop
Coordinator: Luis Rojas
Moderator: Patricia Prez
Trainer: Olga Luna
Support: Daniel Pino and Susana Alegra
Date: 22/05/2002
Place: Cali, Colombia
Invited trainers:
Dr. Nuria Solarte
Joaqun Castao
Time Duration Subject
How?
Who?
8:00
15 minutes
Daily committee
Visualisation
Committee
Flip chart, display boards
8.15
15 minutes
Introduction to the session Visualisation
Patricia
Display board and cards
Patricia: in advance prepare the cards to be displayed

and position the theme well in the workshop;
Susana: locate and handover rolls of film for the
photographic record, take photographs of
the display boards which have been marked.
8:30
45 minutes
Introduction to
environmental monitoring
Display and
survey using
cards
Olga
Display boards, cards,

marker pens and cards
Have marker pens and cards ready to hand out:

Patricia: hand out materials and help collect
them at the end.
9:15
45 minutes
Classification and
comments about
monitoring
Discussion and
Olga
classification with
whole group
Display boards, cards,

marker pens
Olga: complete at the end of the discussion.

Daniel: have three work areas equipped,
hand over the key to Patricia.
10:00
30 minutes
Introduction to working
in groups
Presentation,
activity
Display boards, cards for

the activity, key to the
rooms
Olga: explain and hand out the photocopies

of the tasks. Patricia: reminder people of the
display board with the recommendations
for working in groups.
10:30
15 minutes
Refreshment break
Luis: collect Dr. Nuria from the airport, ensure

there is a place for her at lunch.
10:45
60 minutes
Work in groups
Olga: support the groups if they need help.

Patricia: speak with Dr. Nuria.
11:45
60 minutes
Presentation of results
and final discussion
12:45
90 minutes
Lunch
Exhibitions
Olga
Participants
and Olga
Material
needed
Comments
Patricia: at the end of the session, remind

everyone of the rest of the days programme.
Luis: introduce Dr. Nuria.

as planned, and be able to make alternative

plans or plan Bs.
Planning ability: be able to prioritise

tasks and not start different activities
at the same time, be able to manage
your time and be self-disciplined.1
Ability to work in a group and to

communicate: know and use the rules
for feedback, be able to listen, accept
and consider new proposals.2
The timetable is drawn up by the training team before
the workshop but must be adapted and adjusted to
the needs and circumstances of each day.
7.6.
The coordinator
7.6.1. Who
is the coordinator?
The coordinator is the person who controls the whole

workshop from planning to follow-up, although for
Ability to take the initiative and act when necessary.

Management skills and ability to control a budget:
identify and establish links, draw up and manage the
budget and keep the accounts, as well as taking the
initiative in seeking financial and non-financial
resources.
Administrative ability: write up reports to satisfy to

the requirements of the organisations responsible for
the workshop and process the necessary contracts.
the participants the coordinator may often be the least

visible person in the team. As coordinator you plan,
coordinate, adjust plans, supervise, intervene and
provide information. You are the central point of the
workshop: the head that remembers everything (in
our case, the information) and the heart that pumps
the blood (the requirements of the workshop).
7.6.2. What
7.6.3. What
are the coordinators tasks?
The tasks we have described in detail in the sections

Creating the training workshop and Organising a
training workshop are the responsibility of the
coordinator. Therefore, in this chapter we summarise
these tasks, showing where they fit into the different
phases of a workshop.
abilities does the coordinator have?
In our experience, the strengths of a good coordinator
Before the workshop
are the following:
When designing the workshop, you draw up the first

draft of the thematic and methodological design taking
Training ability: have basic notions of the subject and
account of:
the methodology.
1 See: p. 27, Section 3.4 Conceptual framework,
Organisational ability: have an overview of the

activities, remain calm when things do not work out
Time management
2 See: p. 106, Section 8.1.5 The toolbox, Feedback, Suggestions
87 / 204

88 / 204
Duration
Subject
Example of a workshop timetable
Title:
Time
How?
Who?
Date:
Material needed
Place:
Comments

The background and objective of the training.

The themes and necessary focus.
The principal criteria for choosing trainers: their
experience in the subject and their personal strengths
as trainers and speakers.
Who the workshop is directed at, i.e. the personal,
Employ the members of the support team giving

them precise instructions.
Define and agree with the training team the role of
each person.
Give each person the information needed in order
for the training team to function well.
professional and institutional profile of the

beneficiary participants.
You will announce and confirm the time of the

workshop to the participants and the training team.
The basic principles of learning.1

The biorhythms of a person during the day and
over the duration of a workshop.2
You will discuss and refine this first draft with the
training team.
You plan budgets and manage financial resources as
well as ensuring the following aspects of the workshop
logistics are in place:
Appropriate venue: accessible, with the necessary
electrical and communications installations and with
During the workshop
a positive atmosphere for the dynamics of the group
You ensure the training team functions by:
and for
learning.3
Technical material and equipment.4

You select and coordinate the training team:5
Decide with the moderators and trainers the themes
and methodology to be used in the workshop.
Calling the daily meetings of the training team.

Being the person that everyone can go to.
Acting as the information centre, receiving
information and distributing it to the people who
need it.
Having control of the tasks and delegating these
where necessary.
You present the workshop schedule and seek to ensure
1-2
See: p 13, Section 3.1 Conceptual framework, Learning
it is adhered to:
3 See: p 44, Section 5.6 Organisation of a training workshop,
Workshop venue
4 See: p 48, Section 5.7 Organisation of a training
workshop, Materials
5 See: p 83, Section 7.3 Training equipment, Composition
of the team
Participating in the installation of the workshop,

presenting what has been agreed with the team.
Continuously checking and adjusting the workshop
planning with the training team.
89 / 204
90 / 204

You address the logistical needs of the workshop with

the support team:
In the light of our experience we

believe that it is worth being realistic
Availability of necessary technical equipment and
and honest with yourself about
materials.
accepting
the
position
of
coordinator. It is important to be realistic
Availability of meals at the time and in the place

required.
about your own strengths and weaknesses

in relation to the coordinators tasks; analyse
Organising excursions and field trips.
these and look at the possibility of delegating
Organising leisure activities.
or sharing with another person in the team
Confirm the tickets for the participants and training
those tasks for which you lack the skills.
team.
Draw up the certificates and have these signed.
We consider that the ability to organise, plan,
The necessary support for creating the photographic
communicate and produce initiatives are

essential qualities for a coordinator. The
record.
budgetary and administrative work and the

You control the budget and carry out administrative
logistics can be delegated providing you
procedures, for example, paying outstanding accounts.
remain responsible for ensuring that the work

is carried out.
After the workshop

You evaluate the workshop with the team and the
oganisations responsible for the workshop.
7.7.
The moderator
You are responsible for handing over the workshop

space as agreed.
You ensure that information is retained for the followup, and that unused material is kept.
You ensure that the photographic record is completed
and sent to the participants, the training team and the
responsible institutions.
You close the accounts.
7.7.1. Who
is the moderator?
The moderator is responsible for the application and

You make clear the commitments for the follow-up.
execution of the tools used to facilitate the learning of

the workshop content. The moderator is also in charge
You write a report for the sponsors and the
of the process and dynamics of the workshop. The
oragnisations that have held the workshop.
moderator stabilises and manages the process ensuring

that the focus is retained in order to arrive at the results

in accordance with the objectives of the workshop.
Instigating discussion without imposing your own

views.
Incorporating contributions and giving them the
The moderator must be present and be certain that a
appropriate attention.
workshop is taking place in line with the following

Summarising and combining the participants
factors:
contributions.
Thematic factor: for example, visualising the process

and its results.
Ability to manage the group: generate a positive and

pleasant atmosphere to facilitate everyones
Emotional factor: for example, contextualising the
participation. This also means having the sensitivity to
latent conflicts in the workshop.
detect and deal with conflicts at the right time and at

the right level, bearing in mind that group conflicts
Methodological factor: for example, clarifying why
should not be assumed as your own, and a position
and how each tool is used and for what purpose.
for or against should not be taken but a neutral attitude

maintained at all times.
The moderator considers these factors in an integral

way, promoting the participation of everyone.
It is important to maintain the balance between being

tolerant and being strict when necessary for the process,
7.7.2. What
abilities does the moderator have?
In our experience the strengths of a good moderator
without imposing your own ideas or opinions on the

participants.2
are the following:
Ability to plan: manage time without becoming a slave

Training ability: have in depth knowledge of the
to it and without interrupting the workshop process.
methodology and basic notions of the subject matter.
For this you must be able to prioritise, take the initiative
Keep in mind that the objective of the workshop is to
and be flexible in order to be able to decide quickly
reinforce the content and that the methodology is a
how to continue and adjust the schedule whilst it is in
means of achieving this.
progress. It is also necessary to plan and organise the

required materials in a timely way.
Ability to work in a team.
Ability to reflect: this refers both to the analysis and
Ability to communicate: know and use suggestions to
feedback relating to the process and to self-examination.
apply the feedback and respond to body language.1 It
The participants will identify with the moderator and
is also important to know how to listen actively, this
will take their example from him or her. Therefore the
means:
Differentiating objective contributions and emotional
contributions.
Formulating precise questions to clarify contributions
or make them specific.
1 See: p. 20 Section 3.2.2 Conceptual framework, Body language;
and p. 105 Section 8.1.5 The toolbox, Feedback

See: p. 22 Section 3.3 Conceptual framework, Participation
3 See: p. 107 Section 8.2 The toolbox
2
91 / 204
92 / 204

moderator must control his own behaviour and
abide by, and you explain the suggestions that it is
decisions throughout the whole process.
important to accept for the feedback.2
Ability to visualise.3
Ability to motivate: to facilitate an open and trusting
atmosphere using appropriate tools to relax and facilitate
the learning days.1
Ability to adhere to the focal thread.
You monitor compliance with the rules of the game

throughout the workshop and therefore you must be
the first person to abide by them because, as we have
mentioned, your behaviour is the example that the group
will follow. If you see that there are certain rules that
are never complied with, bring this up at the plenary
session and decide with the participants how to proceed:
annul them, change them or together seek a constructive
7.7.3.
What are the moderators tasks?
penalty for non-compliance.
When you assume the role of moderator of a workshop,

you will have the following functions:
You support the trainers sessions and agree with each

trainer the type of support that he/she will need.
Before the workshop
Independently of what is agreed, be ready

to assist if unforeseen situations
You participate in the preparation
arise, such as difficulties in
meetings: it is important to be
using
in permanent contact with
the
technical
the training team in order
equipment or situations of
to coordinate, draw up
conflict between the
and reach agreements
trainer
about the workshop.
participants.
the
You stimulate the discussion
You ensure that the tools
and ensure that it flows. You
chosen support the focal
listen actively and ensure that all
thread of the workshop and the
the participants have the same chance
learning process. This means that the
to participate in the discussion. You also promote
tools must constitute a coherent ensemble that

reinforces and knits together the training process.
and
discussion but without advising on the subject matter

or imposing you own opinion or ideas.
You discuss and agree the most appropriate tools with

the trainers.
You remain vigilant that the focal thread of the workshop

is present and adhered to. From time to time there may
You arrive a day before the workshop to attend the
be deviations that are necessary and productive for the
training team meeting and prepare the first day in detail.
During the workshop
At the start of the workshop you agree with the
2 See: p. 82 Section 6.6 Running the workshop; List of possible
participants the rules of the game that everybody will
See: p. 121-176 The toolbox.

rules of the game.

subject concerned. But if the discussion becomes

entangled or strays completely, you must intervene
diplomatically, recalling the theme of each session and
the workshop in general and bringing the participants
and sometimes the trainer back to the central point.
In this way you do not involve yourself in the content
of the discussion but you direct it.
After the workshop

You participate in the final training team meeting,
i.e. the full evaluation of the workshop and the design
of the follow-up.
You fulfill commitments you have for the follow-up. If
necessary you revise the photographic record.
You facilitate everybodys participation. As moderator

you employ sensitivity and group management so as to
motivate and stimulate the quieter participants and
restrain those who talk a lot.1 The participation of all is
also achieved by choosing the appropriate tools, for
example, working in groups.
As we have stated, the workshop is a

space for participation and permanent
development. Therefore you are aware
of and show sensitivity to the learning
needs and requirements of the
participants. Always remember: you work with
and for the participants.
You ensure that the agreements and results of the

workshop are not lost. This can be achieved using
visualisation and summaries, among other possible
means.
Avoid assuming conflicts personally. Do not make

an over-strong defence of the content,
methodology or tools as these are not your own.
Explain them and reach an agreement with the
participants about the desirability or otherwise of
using them.
You detect potential conflicts in time. You must be

sensitive to non-verbal signs, i.e. the participants body
language, to identify this type of situation in time. In
this way, you can make these situations explicit and,
with the participants, seek solutions to overcome them.
You are aware of the time devoted to each activity.
When some discussion or activities continue beyond
the time allocated, you must take the decision whether
to keep strictly to the timetable, allow the discussion to
continue, or bring the activity to an end if this is fruitful
for the workshop process.
You must maintain a neutral and open attitude.

Try to integrate all participants even outside
working hours because there are shy people who
need a little support to motivate them and give
them confidence. But be careful, outside the
workshop you still have to demonstrate
professional behaviour, although this does not
mean you cannot be good humoured quite the
contrary!
For the photographic record,2 you keep in mind

visualisation that is clear and legible.3
Enjoy the workshop and in difficult situations

remember: practise makes perfect and the next
time it will be easier.
You participate in the daily training team meetings to

evaluate, adjust and refine the workshop schedule whilst
this is in progress. Here too it is very important to seek
the feedback and advice of the training team about
your work and behaviour.
1
2
See: p. 193 Section 9.2.2 Problems, Types of participants

See: p. 78 Section 6.5 Running the workshop, The
photographic record
3 See: p. 109 & 118 The toolbox, Recommendations
93 / 204
94 / 204

7.8.
The trainer
Ability to communicate ideas and pass on knowledge:

you can satisfy the participants need to learn something
We identify two types of trainer:

The trainer who is present throughout the workshop
and is part of the training team.
new or improve their knowledge.

You achieve better levels of teaching by using the
appropriate tools1 . You also achieve this if you reinforce
The trainer who is invited to develop a specific theme
the concepts with examples and your own experiences,
or provide support for the in-depth treatment of a
with the experiences of others or of the participants
theme, for example by presenting an experience. This
and if you demonstrate and facilitate putting it into
person will be advised in time and will be integrated
practice.
into the team whilst at the workshop.
Ability to plan and manage time: you will make ordered

7.8.1. Who
is the trainer?
The trainer is the person responsible for the
presentations of sufficient duration leaving time for

each of the planned activities; for example, in depth
treatment, work in groups or work
workshop theme. He or she identifies
involving all those present.
the relevant content in order to

facilitate learning. He should
consult the moderator when
Flexible and sensitive attitude:
choosing the most suitable
it is desirable for you to keep
methodological focus for
an open mind for group
addressing the content.
work and if necessary agree

and
create
participants
As our explanation of the ro-
with
the
approaches
different from your own. Usually,
les in the training team has
you will work with a heterogeneous
shown, it is not essential for the
group of adults who have academic
trainer to deliver the whole workshop

content. Some content can be dealt with by another
training, jobs and experience and already established
team member; the important factor is that the logical
attitudes.
sequence of the subject matter is retained throughout

the workshop; this is the responsibility of the trainer.
Ability to synthesize: you feedback the participants

contributions in an objective way, consolidating the
7.8.2. What
abilities does the trainer have?
results of the workshop. On the basis of the different
In our experience, if you are going to assume the
contributions and discussion, you must also combine
responsibility of the trainer, it is helpful to have the
the contents; for example make a summary, highlighting
following strengths:
Knowledge of the subject matter and practical

experience: you have complete command of the theory
and the practice.
See: p. 118 Section 8.3 The toolbox, Tools for training

the most relevant points, drawing synoptic charts, plans
alternatives, for example field trips, which will be
or diagrams.
most beneficial in supporting the content.
Capacity for self-control: remember that your attitude
You prepare the contents for each theme. Because it
and appearance in itself sends out a message. You are
is used to create the workshop timetable it is important
there to complement knowledge, which gives you
for your presentation to be in a logical order.3
power which you need to handle prudently and

intelligently. Therefore, you must adopt an open
You define the tools and technical equipment needed
approach, remaining calm and in control during the
for each session and discuss them with the training
various discussions.
team; for example, the case studies to consider or the

simulation games to bear in mind or the tasks for
Ability to manage the visual aids: you must have

adequate knowledge of the visualisation
tools1
working in groups.
and
how to work the technical equipment you are going
You prepare the visual aids for presentation and the
to use; if you lack these skills, ask the moderator for
materials to hand out to the participants, such as the
assistance.
bibliography or books they must bring to the workshop,

and you select the photocopies.
7.8.3. What
are the trainers tasks?
When you have been invited and have agreed to
You are in constant communication with the training
participate in a workshop as a trainer, you must bear
team to continue refining the workshop schedule.
in mind the following functions:

You arrive one day before the workshop and participate
Before the workshop
in the detailed planning of the different sessions, you
With the coordinator you select the thematic content.
review your presentation and prepare the materials
For this you need information about the background
for the induction and other sessions in which you
of the workshop (training needs and justification) and
participate.
the personal and professional profile of the

participants.2
During the workshop

You present the themes and place these within the
You participate in the workshop preparation meetings
framework of the workshop. For each theme, you
in which the training team presents, discusses and
present the content and the way in which it is going to
agrees matters relating to the workshop. In this way:
be dealt with.
You ensure that the focus and thematic content are

selected according to the level of the participants
and the time available.
You suggest other trainers if necessary who could
be invited to develop or support a specific theme.
You agree with the coordinator and the moderator
the requirement for practical scenarios to support
the development of the content and the possible
1 See: p. 107 Section 8.2 The toolbox, Tools for visualisation

2 See: p. 34 Section 4.2 The training workshop, Creating the
training workshop
3 See: p. 86 Section 7.5 The training equipment,The timetable
95 / 204
96 / 204

You close each thematic session ensuring that all the

concepts are clear and that the learning objectives are
being achieved.
You participate in the ongoing feedback meetings of
the training team and objectively evaluate the progress
of the schedule in order to adjust it according to the
training needs, both in terms of the content and the
methodology.
You review and adjust the thematic and material content
each day.
The trainer ensures that the contents are transmitted in
a language that is understandable for participants of
You try to have the time available for extracurricular
all levels and from all backgrounds.
conversations with the participants.
You ensure the logical sequence and linking of the
After the workshop
themes.
You comply with the commitments and schedule you

have agreed to.
You refine, with the moderator, the instructions that

will be given to the participants for group work and
you facilitate contributions using different
tools.1
You participate in the evaluation of the workshop and

the design of the follow-up.
You take advantage of visits and excursions to reinforce
You review the photographic record so that the contents
knowledge. If necessary, use materials such as maps,
are correct in relation to the process and the results.
plans, diagrams and exercises.

You contribute to a more detailed understanding of
the themes, facilitating bibliographical references,
recommending other experts on the subject, suggesting
ways to experience something in different contexts or
giving out internet addresses.
1 See: p. 101 Section 8.1 The toolbox, Tools for participation

2 See: p. 13 Section 3.1 Conceptual Framework, Learning
Each trainer has a particular style

when dealing with the subject
matter and behaving in front of a
group, but remember that your relationship
with the participants takes place on two
interdependent levels: an objective level the
things you say and another emotional level
how you say them.2 Therefore if, as trainer
in a workshop, you are only interested in
presenting the content and do not take the
trouble to create and facilitate an atmosphere
of harmony and understanding with the

participants, it will be difficult for the

participants to assimilate the content.
In our experience, as a trainer you must pay
attention to the following elements:
Truth does not simply exist, it is built. The
search for answers to a problem is a purpose
that brings people together. The workshop is
a space to share, make suggestions, discuss,
agree and build answers.
7.9.
The support people
7.9.1. Who
are the support people?
The support people liaise with the different aspects of

logistics, depending on the needs of the workshop. In
a participatory and visual type of workshop
simultaneous logistical needs occur. If the economic
resources exist, one or two people can be employed
specifically for this function; this will mean the
workshop can run more quickly. If this is not the case,
The starting point is not zero, i.e. the

experience, prejudices and knowledge of the
participants are the starting point for
beginning to reflect on the subject, improve
skills and create the potential for change. It
is important to explore the participants
opinions on every topic.
these tasks can be allocated as agreed and carried out
Nobody is completely ignorant and nobody

knows everything. Therefore, evaluate and
integrate the different day-to-day and
institutional experiences of the participants
when dealing with each theme.
Pleasant and open personality that allows them to work
by the training team.

7.9.2. What
abilities do the support people need?
In our experience, a support person will work well if

he or she has the following qualities:
in a team and relate easily to the participants.
Responsibility and punctuality.
Retain objectivity throughout the

workshop.
Ability to plan and prioritise tasks.
Take care in addressing the participants

political, moral, cultural and religious
feelings.
Ability to organise and maintain order.
Only use examples you know well.
documents and display boards and create tables,
Adopt a professional and serious attitude,

even outside working sessions.
acetates, plans or diagrams.
Stay calm and be tolerant and open to

different opinions.
Remember that laughter helps learning
and you will be surprised at the quantity and
quality of contributions you receive during
a workshop.
Ability to use computers and programmes to type up
Ability to handle technical equipment and visual aids.

To know of or be able to locate places or key items
close by, such as photocopiers, photographic stores,
stationers and other places that may be used to provide
services during the workshop.
97 / 204
98 / 204

7.9.3. What
tasks do they
(what the workshop consists
have?
of and how it is to be run) so
As a support person you will
that you can analyse the
be
different support options for
managed
by
the
the workshop.
coordinator, although you

liaise with all the members of
the training team. Usually, you
You get to know the people
are present from the day
in the training team and their
before until one day after the
roles.
workshop.
You gain information about
Before the workshop
the number of participants
You check that the quantity of
and their profiles.
materials is sufficient for the
During the workshop
different sessions.
You contribute to ensuring

You check that the technical
the group work rooms are
equipment is available and in
clean and tidy.
working order.
You ensure that there are always enough materials
You help to prepare the materials for the opening of
available (marker pens, newspaper, cards, pins, glue,
the workshop, as well as the room where the workshop
masking tape).
will take place and other rooms that may be needed.

You keep the visualisation materials ready for each
You prepare your workspace, with the resources
session, i.e. enough paper on the flipchart, the display
available, such as computer, printer, paper for the
boards are covered with paper, the display boards in
printer, telephone directory, important telephone
use are in good condition, sufficient cards in a variety
numbers, city map and other office materials.
of colours and shapes and the pins in the designated

places.
You and your colleague if applicable share the tasks

on the first day as shown in the workshop timetable;
You anticipate when technical equipment and teaching
for example, one will ensure constant availability of
materials might be needed and you put the teaching
display boards and the other will create the
materials for each workshop session in the designated
photographic record.
places. For this task you should pay attention to the

workshop timetable and to instructions from the training
You ensure you know the surrounding area and the
team.
key places that might be needed, for example, a

photocopy service.
You liaise with whoever is necessary to ensure meals

and refreshments are on time and served in the
You familiarise yourself with the general programme
designated places.

As instructed by the training team, you organise the
After the workshop
display boards after each session or carefully fix the
You hand over material that is outstanding.
cards on the display boards and retain those that are

to be kept, placing others in the recommended places
You return the equipment and assist with handing back
(some can be used as teaching materials in later
the installations in the condition in which they were
sessions) or discard those that are not needed.
found.
You transcribe the training materials as instructed by

the team; for example, make a fair copy of the
workshop timetable, create tables or matrices.
You collaborate in creating the photographic record,
depending on the recommendations of the person
responsible; for example, take some photos, have them
developed, crop and organise them as instructed.
You obtain general information and make it available
for the people in the workshop, such as the map of
the surrounding area, the public transport system and
the prices, important telephone numbers, access to
tourist sites with charges and opening hours, the
addresses of other sites of interest that may be relevant
to the workshop.
You create a directory of all participants in the
workshop and check that the information is complete
and correct.
Participation in a workshop also

allows you, as a support person, to
relate to the participants and the
training team, giving you the chance
to share and learn practical things for the
future. This can be achieved if you take an
interest and keep an open mind.
In order to make the most of the working
experience to achieve a good balance between
learning and enjoying the workshop, among
other things we recommend the following:
Make enough time available to be
permanently in the workshop.
Ask and be sure that the procedures and
results of the tasks are clearly understood. This
will avoid the repetition of some tasks and
therefore unnecessary use of time.
If any doubts remain about the order of the
cards on the display boards, it is best to ask
the person responsible before putting them in
place.
In distributing the tasks, bear in mind individual abilities and the priorities of the
workshop and inform the coordinator about
these arrangements.
As you are in a participatory space and all
ideas count, you must communicate your
initiatives and suggestions to the training
team so that they can be taken into account.
99 / 204
100 / 204
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / The tool box

The tool box
8.
n training workshops, the most important thing
Through the previous activity I can organise a role
is that people learn and then apply this learning
playing game with a view to studying the theme in
to their daily lives. We have already seen the
depth and allow those taking part to refer to and
conceptual frameworks for the training workshop:
apply their own experiences.
learning, communication, participation and time

management.
The results of the previous teamwork can be brought

to life with a visualisation tool. For example, cards,
Once you are clear about the focus of your training,
in order to reach conclusions that can be built into
your main challenge is to make the learning and
a display of key ideas.
participation viable by choosing and implementing the

most appropriate tools tools. We will not enter into
any semantic discussion about what is method,
instrument, technique or material. We will simply offer
the tools that you can choose according to your needs
be they visualisation, participation, analysis,
presentation, integration, etc.
These tools can be combined according to need.
For example, if we suggest studying a theme in depth,
we could choose a number of tools such as the
In this example we use tools to simultaneously

encourage participation and to visualise ideas or
processes, which are generally tools for training and
development.
We are aware that our tool box does not contain
everything. You might also know of other tools you
may want to use and combine with those we present
here; that is exactly what it is about, that you go on to
perfect your own Personalised Tool Box.
following:
8.1.
Tools for participation
With a visualisation tool I present the conceptual

stages.
8.1.1. How
can we encourage participation?
One of the main challenges facing the trainer in the

Then through a brainstorm of ideas with cards I
development of a workshop is achieving full
allow those taking part to contribute ideas from their
participation. When preparing the workshop, it is
own experiences to enrich the presentation.
important to bear in mind that the activities and tools
101 / 204
102 / 204

to be used in training will to a large part determine its
It is important to provide opportunities for integration
success.
through games or extracurricular activities.
Occasionally, one might think that using tools for
It is better to rotate and change the working groups
participation alone will be sufficient to achieve high
to allow members to swap groups and get to know all
levels of participation; in reality, although these tools
the other participants; this also facilitates the integration
are very helpful, they are not sufficient on their own
of the more timid members of the group.
for the participants to become totally involved in and

committed to the learning process. According to what
Pay attention to the body language of the
we have been able to establish through our own
participants.1 This helps us to recognise their doubts,
experiences as trainers, we include below some of the
their disagreements or non-conformity with the
conditions that should be applied to make participation
information presented. You, as moderator, are
in the workshop effective.
responsible for active participation and should make

it easy for participants to ask questions confidently
Achieving a match between the needs of those taking
and without fear.
part and the training theme, determines the level of

participants interest and their desire to get involved in
The actual atmosphere of the venue and in turn of
the workshop.
the training, influences participation. The working

environment of the room determines whether those
It is better to limit the size of the group to around
taking part feel at ease, attentive and alert; for example,
25 people and throughout the training workshop look
chairs set out in rows limit visibility, communication
for activities that can be carried out in groups of no
between participants, joint understanding and group
more than five members.
integration. Therefore, you should estimate how much

space is required for each activity in the workshop so
The special role of the moderator is to motivate and
those taking part can work comfortably.2
ensure that each person takes part, to balance the

various personalities in the group and respect the
Visualisation is the basis for many of the tools that
different contributions.
encourage participation; it is important that both the

layout and combination of visual elements are the most
A determining factor that facilitates fairness in
appropriate for that particular stage of the
participation is to establish rules of the game for
implementation of the workshop.3
behaviour and interaction in the workshop and ensure

they are complied with.
The workshop should develop with a sense of
progress in which the themes are linked, through a

series of steps that follow a logical order; for example,
presentations to the group as a whole, individual
reflection, collective work, pair work or group work
and a full session for agreements and conclusions.
See p. 19: Conceptual framework. Communication.
See: p. 44: Organising a training workshop. Workshop

venue.
3
See: p. 107: Toolbox. Tools for visualisation.

8.1.2. Group
work
favours communication and interaction. This positive
Working in small groups is one of the most frequently
relationship between the smaller group and greater
used and effective ways of facilitating participation as
participation is useful in strengthening learning.
people are generally more willing to involve themselves

Working in small groups is useful for combining
in a smaller group which, because of its size positively
In
p a r t t e r ac
i c ip t
at
i
ive o n
C on
s
a tt t ruc
i tu
de
e
ti v
Q u es
i n fo t i o n i
rm n
at
i
he
gt n
o
St
con ar t
fi d
en
c
of
in a
ti o n
Decides:
We should, lets . . .
Collective performance
Takes ownership of the
participation
S e lf- d et
er m
How does the group function in

the participation process?
Proposes:
The best way to achieve
the objective is . . .
Recognises and responds
to the collective decision
Suggests:
I assume this responsibility . . .
Willing to participate in
the group
Linking together
of interests
Criticises:
Will this be the
best alternative?
Involvement in
the group
Asks:
Will I be able to say
what I think?
Initial approach
Passiv
ene
ss
General attitude
Observes:
Who will the other
participants be?
Expectation.
Individual attitudes
Individual reflections
Changes in the group
103 / 204
104 / 204

different tools and facilitates participation; for example
The trainer should:
a group approaches a theme with a case study and the

analysis combines it with a conceptual map.1
Ensure that the size of the groups does not exceed

five people so that each member can take part.
Team work also helps to encourage responsibility as it

is easier for members of a small group to take on the
Propose dividing roles within the group; for example,
work, time management, the necessary supervision
somebody controls the time limits, a scribe who
for participation, the production of the results of the
makes a note of contributions from individual
exercise and the presentation to the whole group.
members of the group, a moderator who guides

the group, and a presenter who presents the results,
8.1.3. Recommendations
in forming groups
etc.
Here we show two ways of forming groups

Facilitate the visual presentation of the results of
At random: here there are no defined criteria for the
the group work by providing materials and advice
selection of a group. For example, members of the whole
on how to present it correctly.
group number themselves from 1-4, repeating the

sequence as many times as is necessary; then those
Have the tasks and instructions for group work
with number 1 join together to form group 1, those
clearly visible and have work space prepared with
with number 2 form group 2, and so on. Or also by
all the materials and equipment required.
placing names of animals in a bag 4 or 5 breeds of

cat, 4 or 5 breeds of dog, etc; those who randomly pick
out the same animal form a group. Instead of names of
Ensure that all tasks are completely understood by

all the members of the group.
animals, colours or names of trees, etc can be used.

The option to form groups freely can also be given.
Decide on a time limit for carrying out the task and

for presenting the results.
According to set criteria: certain people are

appointed or put forward to make up part of a group
Remain aware of how the groups develop, lending
with the objective of finding a balance or a desired
support and making group members aware of the
composition; for example, groups with participants of
time limits agreed.
a similar background and training or completely

different background and training; groups with
participants who have the same attitude towards the
The members of the working groups

should endeavour to:
theme or groups with different attitudes towards the

theme; groups of the same gender or mixed groups,
groups from different institutions or similar, etc.
8.1.4. Recommendations
Ensure that all members of the group have

understood the task.
for working in a group
In order for group work to be effective and successful,

both the trainer and the members of the group should
bear in mind a number of considerations.
See: p. 101: Toolbox.Tools for participation.

Find a suitable area to work in, making sure
Feedback is important in training because it encourages
that they have the necessary materials and
and improves positive behaviour and skills, it corrects
equipment.
and improves negative behaviour and reduces

incompetence.
Assume designated roles responsibly.

Feedback can be incorporated into training at different
Structure the subject and how it will be approached,
times and in different situations: for example, after
allocating both the time and the tools to carry it out;
working in groups about the way the team works; or
for example, writing up their own ideas on cards,
after a presentation the person presenting might
then grouping them together and finding the most
receive feedback about the content and their particu-
appropriate title for each
set.1
lar way of presenting. There are different ways to give

feedback: verbally, written by way of a poll with cards
Consult the trainer if there are any doubts about the
or listening to a recording.
theme or procedure before continuing.

We have achieved the best learning with video fee Set aside time to prepare the presentation that should
dback.
include the main contributions and results expressed

in the discussion which took place within the group.
What form should feedback take?

For feedback to be effective and accepted it should
Ensure that the presenter of the results puts forward
be:
the groups ideas and not his or her personal

interpretation of them. If this happens, it should be
Wanted: the most important thing for feedback to
made clear to the whole group.
work is that nobody is forced to give or receive it,

because when it is not welcomed by those taking part
it is neither given nor received well and is therefore
8.1.5. Feedback
counter-productive to learning.
What is feedback?
Descriptive: what has been seen and felt should be
Feedback is the process of giving back impressions,
explained but not interpreted, assessed or graded. The
perceptions or opinions produced by the action and
question is what did I see? Or what impression was I
the behaviour of a person, with the objective of
left with?
strengthening his or her knowledge and abilities. The

fundamentals of feedback are to give and receive, not
Specific: General terms should not be used. Fee-
to give and answer. But receiving and taking on board
dback should be specific to a situation.
criticism can put us in a difficult and uncomfortable

position, as we usually tend to justify and defend our
attitudes or look for others to blame when we receive
a commentary that corrects what we have said. This
attitude can limit the learning potential that feedback
to trainers offers us.
See: p. 138:Toolbox. Tools for training. The poll by cards.
105 / 204
106 / 204

Precise: Feedback should be as clear and exact as
Do not make general criticisms but refer to the
possible without any big introductions or complications,
current time (the here and now) and to a specific
so that it is understandable.
example.
Appropriate: Criticism should be sincere and
Direct your feedback to the person you are criticising,

looking at them directly.
constructive and it should consider the person receiving

it; it must not be negative, scornful or unfair.
Speak in the first person, giving your personal feedback and not other peoples.
Suitable: Only issues a person can change or
Specify the consequences of what has been observed
influence should be criticised or discussed.
or perceived.
At the right time: feedback should be given as soon

as possible so the situation can be recalled.
Make specific proposals and give options for

improvement; do not give advice.
Do not make personal criticisms or make judgements
Suggestions for the trainer
about the persons character.
The trainer should create an open and comfortable
Do not make comparisons.
atmosphere to facilitate feedback, which can be a

delicate situation and occasionally even unpleasant for
Suggestion for the person receiving feedback
the person receiving it.
Listen carefully to the feedback and keep an open
People should not feel obliged to take part in the
mind.
feedback process; you should be sure that everyone
Ask for clarification if you do not understand what
involved wants it.
is said to you.
Before giving a person feedback, they should be

offered the opportunity to express how the experience
was for them and how they felt about the situation.
As the trainer you should not repeat or comment
Do not give any explanations nor justify or defend

yourself.
Choose what you want to accept and apply it.
on what participants have said.

Criticism should not be overstated or excessive.
You need to be the referee and ensure that rules
have been followed, defending the person receiving
feedback whenever that criticism becomes excessive
or unfair.
Allow humour as it removes the fear element and
encourages confidence. However, do not allow people
to make cruel or personal jokes.
Suggestions for the person giving feedback

Mention the positive points first and then the
negative.
Feedback should be carried out

continuously throughout the
training and when applied correctly
it benefits and improves the
relationships between all those taking
part in the workshop the training team and
the participants.
Be happy to have the opportunity to receive feedback. It is a way of improving your abilities
and knowledge.

8.2.
Tools for visualisation
In all types of visualisation, the tendency people have

to read has to be considered, so that visual information
can be absorbed quickly. In our western culture we
In the chapter focussing on learning, we mentioned
read from left to right and top to bottom.
the importance of the senses (sight, smell, touch,

hearing, taste) as ways of receiving information. On
In this chapter we will talk about the different times
average, we acquire 83% of information from sight,
within a workshop when some of the main visualisation
10% from hearing, 4% through smell, 2% through touch
tools can be employed; we have highlighted each tool
and 1% through our sense of taste.
so that it is set in a frame with explanations about the

advantages, disadvantages, dangers and requirements
Hearing
10%
Sight
83%
for using them. At the end, we will talk about the

Smell
4%
Taste
1%
Touch
2%
didactic materials that methodologically sustain the

content of the training.
The choice of one or other form of visualisation is
subject to a number a factors: the size of the group,
the content and theme, the profile and level of training
of those participating, the availability of materials and
technical equipment and when they will be used.
Cards
The objective of visualisation is to encourage learning.
Visualisation with cards is based on the METAPLAN
Visualisation does not substitute oral communication,
concept. Its objective is to facilitate participation and
but supports and complements it. What is presented
learning in the development of the workshop: ideas,
in a report or presentation requires a great deal of
proposals and results of displays, discussions and
concentration for it to be remembered, but if it is
agreements can be written on cards to make them visi-
presented visually it can be memorised more easily.
ble and which then become materials for further work.

This also makes up the daily account of the process
Visual presentation helps:
and forms the basis of the photographic record.
The recipient retain information more

effectively
Cards are not only a method of visualisation for the
Guide participants through the process
participation where those taking part can write down
Reduce the amount of words used

Highlight the essential items
Revise what has been presented
Reduce the risk of misunderstandings
trainers presentations, but also an instrument for

their ideas and contributions. Therefore it is worthwhile
having a basic level of schooling amongst participants.
However, it is also possible to draw images on the
cards, thus substituting the written message, or to assign
individuals to write down the ideas generated in groups
where the participants are illiterate.
107 / 204
108 / 204

Recommendations for
writing on cards
How?
What for?
Why?
Only one idea

per card
Facilitates the
building up of
ideas
More than one idea per

card makes it more
difficult to organise ideas
Maximum of
three lines of
writing per card
Makes it possible
to read them at a
distance of 5m
Three lines of writing

per card is the maximum
for it to remain legible.
Describe the idea

in clear words
To understand
the message
Isolated words do
not mean anything
It completes the
idea or message
One complete
idea may not
fit on one
single card
If more than one

card is needed
to express the
idea, they should
be numbered
Write as though
your writing is
printed Clearly
Italic letters
are difficult
to decipher.
Avoid using only

upper case letters
The first letter

in upper and
the rest in lower
case makes it
easier to read
Leave spaces
between the words
So that the
message is legible
Ifthewordsareveryclose
togetherthearedifficulttoread
Write in blue or
black ink
Only use red or

green ink to highlight
or underline
Red or green writing

does not
photocopy well
Write with the

wider side of the
marker pen
So it reads
more easily
UPPER CASE LETTERS

MAKE
COMPREHENSION
DIFFICULT
This is very thick

This is very fine

How are cards used?
Help participants to think about what has been
Different types, shapes and colours of cards are used
presented and discussed.
in accordance with the structure of the message and
Facilitate the introduction of themes and concepts.
the need to highlight and organise ideas.

Offer an overview of the theme or discussion.
We recommend the following:
Make participants concentrate on the essential points.
Small rectangles for ideas and information.
Help to reach an agreement on the theme.
Ovals for headings and titles that head groups of

ideas and information collated in the rectangles.
Large rectangles for headings or titles of the session

theme or for questions about group work.
Circles to highlight, organise or evaluate a point.

Clouds: for headings or general and important
questions.
In addition to the above mentioned recommendations,

bear in mind that:
For many of those taking part, this is a new way of
working, therefore it is important to allow plenty of
time for people to adapt to this tool and adopt its
rules.
For some people cards can be too rigid and
restrictive.
Avoid cards in strong or lurid colours that might

dominate and devalue the message of the idea. Also,
A lot of materials are required (cards, marker pens,
if you intend to take photographs of the displays, it is
posters, pins, etc.)
better to use light coloured cards. To avoid distracting

the eye or making learning difficult, a display should
The flipchart
not be overloaded with too many colours; it is ideal to
The flipchart is the best known and most widely used
use no more than four colours per display.
method for small working groups or during a group

presentation and in many places it has replaced the
You can freely choose the shape and colour of your
traditional blackboard. Usually with a flipchart you note
cards; we recommend that you follow a logical

structure in their use so that they aid learning.1 Cards
also:
Allow the gathering and organisation of ideas, the
introduction and following of changes.
Allow the combination of different shapes and
colours to differentiate messages according to their
content.
Can hold complementary themes and information.
Make information ever present.
Allow you to see the organisation and process of
the discussion.
See: p. 54: Organising a training workshop. Format of materials

list required for running a visual participative workshop
109 / 204
110 / 204

down only the main ideas and key concepts of the
Use drawings and graphics: often a picture or graphic
presentation. Words, letters and graphics need to be
image can say more than words.
written in an appropriate size so they can be read

from a distance. Furthermore, you must ensure that
words are written in straight lines and with clear images.
Use the same format throughout the presentation.

For example, use only one type of font and the same
type of numbering when organising information.
Sheets that have been used and that contain useful

information can be hung up in the room so that they
are visible to the participants.
Acetates or transparencies
Acetates are generally used for presentations to the
The multi-media projector

Multi-media presentations can be interpreted as the
evolution and improvement on the acetate; therefore
the notes and recommendations made about acetates
are also valid for a multi-media presentation.
whole group and can be used for large groups. Before

using acetates or transparencies, you must ensure that
you have the correct equipment and fittings in an
Usually, a projector presentation uses various colours

and moving images; therefore take into account that:
appropriate place: overhead projector, electricity,

sockets within reach, electrical extension leads and
The projection of colours can change from one
surface for projection.
projector to another; it is recommended that the

presentation be tested out on the equipment available
To prepare acetates and transparencies, bear the
at the workshop.
following points in mind:
If you are going to make a multi-media presentation

on acetates, it is possible that you may have to change
Use a font size that can be easily read (min. 8mm)
some colours and backgrounds and some of the text
and do not write more than eight lines per acetate.
to obtain a light background and dark lettering.
Leave plenty of margin space: the area that is
Use available effects in a manner appropriate to the
projected is not the total area of the acetate. When
content and group.
using acetates in landscape format, margins on the left

and right should be 5cm, and top and bottom 3cm.
When using acetates in portrait format, margins should
Other: posters, maps, slides, photographs, films

or videos, audio and visual aids, etc.
be 3cm for left and right and 5cm for top and bottom.
These can also be interesting to give a visual dimension
Use upper and lower case letters: text written solely

in upper case is difficult to read. You should also opt
for printed letters, which are more legible than
manuscript.
Choose an appropriate contrast between the
to your presentation. Usually, these materials have been

used before; you therefore need to decide whether
they deal precisely with the theme and desired content
or whether they merely touch upon it superficially.
You also need to decide whether they are appropriate
for those taking part in the workshop.
text and background: dark lettering on a light background is easier to read than light lettering on a dark
Didactic materials
background, it saves on printing ink and photocopies
Didactic materials are what you give out to
better.
the participants to reinforce and complement learning,

such as documents, bibliographies and working

Materials for
the participants
manuals.
Usually there is a tendency to be more concerned
with including a large amount of information than
with dedicating time and attention to the suitability
and visual clarity of the material. Obviously, the
content and essence of the document is what needs
to be transmitted; but the material should be attractive
and enjoyable, as this will encourage the participants
to read it, which is the very objective it is trying to
achieve.
They may create interruptions in the training session

and distract those taking part.
At the time the material is given out, the possibility
of a critical discussion about its content is limited.
Didactic materials for training can be given to
It is beneficial to hand out materials after the workshop:
participants before, during or after the workshop. The
if the objective is to complement and document the
decision of when to do it is subject to training needs.
presentations and reinforce the training follow-up. The

photographic record or more specific texts about the
It is beneficial to hand out materials before the

workshop if the objective is:
themes dealt with in the training can be some of the

material sent to participants after the workshop.
to inform participants beforehand and generate a

common basis for the theme. These are generally
Some advantages of handing out material after the
reading texts that introduce the theme to participants.
workshop are:
Participants are motivated to make their own notes
It is beneficial to hand out materials during the

workshop if the objective is:
to encourage learning at the same time as the
during the workshop.

The content of the material refers directly to the
specific topics covered in the workshop.
presentation. They could be summaries or key notes
They generally correspond to the interests and
about the workshop theme or reading texts. If they
requests of the participants with the objective of
are instruction manuals, you should hand them out
delving deeper into the subject.
when they are to be used.
They support the follow-up tasks and commitments.
Other advantages of handing out materials during the
If you decide to hand out materials after the workshop
workshop are:
then take into consideration that:
The materials become part of the learning process.
Those taking part cannot add their own notes directly
Participants can add their own notes to the materials.
to the materials.
The trainer can observe and note how the materials
There is the danger of materials not being read but
are received and utilised.
instead put away without being used.

It reduces feedback.
If you decide to distribute materials during the
It can be costly and time consuming to send them
workshop, bear in mind that:
on.
111 / 204
112 / 204

8.2.1. Presentation
tools
Cards
Advantages
Very versatile
Can be made up with the
help of participants
Favours participation
You can give a logical and
ordered sequence of ideas
and group them into
categories to visualise the
processes.
Disadvantages
Can only be used for small
groups (up to 25
participants)
They require the trainer to
be dextrous when handling
this tool and to give very
specific instructions to the
participants
They require the use of a
lot of materials
Dangers
That the trainer is not clear
on the objective of the display or how it should be:
the exercise can end up
confused and important
ideas lost.
What do I need?
Strong paper
Cards
Pins
Adhesive tape
Glue
Marker pens
A large wall to display cards
25 x 42 cm
11 x 19 cm
14 cm
10 x 55 cm
10 x 20.5 cm
19.5 cm
Flipchart
Advantages
Low cost.
Easily transportable;
presentations can be made away
from the main area of the
workshop, even outside.
Very few technical requirements.
It allows sheets to be produced
beforehand and notes, ideas and
contributions can be added
during the presentation or
immediately after the
presentation.
It can be prepared and
produced on site.
Information can remain on
display throughout the whole
workshop.
If you experience technical
problems with a presentation
you have prepared on a
computer or acetates, the
flipchart can get you out of jam
and you can still make your
presentation.
Disadvantages
Bulky to store away.
Can only be used with
small groups (maximum 15
people).
The person making the
presentation spends much
of the time with their back
to the rest of the group.
Dangers
Your writing may start off
legible and then get smaller
and smaller to become
illegible.
You may miscalculate the
space available or the
amount of information that
can fit onto each sheet.
You may miscalculate the
number of sheets needed
for the presentation.
You may go over the time
allowed for the
presentation.
What do I need?
A flipchart
Paper
Marker pens
If you are planning to add further
information to the sheets during
the presentation, prepare a model
to work from with the amount of
information that goes on each page
together with the layout. Make a
note on each sheet how long it
takes to calculate the length of the
presentation.
THE MOST
important
thing . . .

Acetates
Advantages
You can build up and improve
your presentation adding
further information and notes with a special marker pen
during the presentation.
The trainer does not require
any par ticular skill to use
them.
They can be changed and
printed off on your own
computer.
They can be filed easily.
They take up very little space.
You can build on a concept
or image (diagram, map, etc)
during the presentation to
illustrate a process or a logical
order by adding fur ther
acetates.
Disadvantages
Acetates require order and
you need to know your
presentation thoroughly
(acetates should be
numbered for each event or
presentation).
There is only space on each
acetates for a few lines of
reasonably sized text;
therefore they can only be
used to highlight ideas or key
concepts that then must be
developed verbally by the
trainer or the person making
the presentation.
The room must be dark to
use the projector, which
makes it difficult for
participants to take notes.
You have to produce written
hand outs that include the
ideas and concepts produced
on the acetates together with
more detailed information
from the verbal presentation;
therefore acetates cannot
usually simply be photocopied
and distributed a separate
sheet needs to be produced.
Dangers
Too much information and
small type on acetates can
make them illegible when
projected.
The image projected may
not fit the size of the screen.
Faded, aged or ruled
acetates become illegible.
Solid text is more
appropriate for a brochure
or leaflet.
If the projector stays
switched on without being
used, it can distract peoples
attention.
The presentation may not
coincide with the acetate on
the screen.
You may not have enough
time to show all the
acetates and may end the
presentation without having
presented some of the key
concepts.
You may waste time
adjusting the image
(position, focus, distance,
connections, etc.)
The light bulb burns out.
What do I need?
An initial outline that
serves as a guide for
developing ideas for the
acetates in an orderly
manner.
Acetates that can be used
on a laser printer, dot
matrix printer or
photocopier, and that can
be printed in colour or
black ink (according to
requirements or
equipment).
Special pens for acetates
(permanent ink).
Overhead projector.
Spare bulb.
An outline for the person
making the presentation
with additional ideas that
should be developed
verbally, following each
acetate.
113 / 204

Displays
What do I need?
Strong paper
Images, photographs, maps, diagrams, etc.
Glue
Printing resources, writing materials
Adhesive tape or other means of putting
them on the wall.
Slides
Advantages
You can build up and improve
your presentation by adding
or changing slides.
You can combine images with
text.
Your presentation can be
made to small or large groups.
They are particularly useful to
demonstrate detail or
machinery, places, people and
general images captured on
camera.
Disadvantages
You cannot add any additional
information during the
presentation.
They are easily damaged.
They can only be referred to
in a specific order.
Costly to produce.
The room needs to be dark
making it difficult for
participants to make their
own notes.
Dangers
Using poor quality photographs,
which only become evident when
the slide has been projected.
Technical and logistical problems
on the day of the presentation; the
film becomes tangled, the bulb
blows, there is a electrical power
cut . . .
What do I need?
A script
A presentation produced on a
computer and additional images to
be sent away and made into slides.
To number the slides.
A room with appropriate technical
resources: projection equipment,
table, remote control.
Spare bulb.
To do a trial run so the
presentation runs smoothly; to
check the clarity and quality of the
slides, the location of the
equipment, the focus and visibility
from all parts of the room.
Low Fee by Polling
Obligatory Low Fee
High Fee by Polling
Obligatory High Fee
Gain in each situation
Low Fee by Polling/On each round.
Disadvantages
They require time to
design and make up.
You cannot add
commentary or notes to
them.
You need a lot of space
to exhibit them.
Dangers
You may use notes written by other
people or you are not completely familiar
with them.
Notes may be read literally, or rather, the
presentation can become narrated and
concepts can lose meaning and depth.
You may get used to using the notes or
depend on them to speak in a clear and
logical manner.
The presentation does not coincide with
the written information given out to the
participants.
No rules
Advantages
They allow information to
be presented in a
systematic way and can
include photographs,
images, maps, diagrams
and text.
They can be exhibited
throughout the whole
workshop
They are easy to use.
Group Discussion.
114 / 204

Notes or
prompts
Advantages
They complement
information that has
been presented by
other means
acetates, slides,
computer, etc.
They refresh the
memor y of the
person making the
presentation and
help them to follow
the main thread of
the theme being
presented.
Useful to call up and
include statistical
data.
If your technical
equipment fails, you
can still make a verbal presentation.
Disadvantages
presentation must develop their
own style to create notes that are
easy to follow and understand.
Dangers
You use notes that have been
written by someone else and that
you are not completely familiar
with.
You simply read out the notes and
the presentation becomes
narrated so that concepts lose
meaning and depth.
You get used to using notes and
depend on them to speak in a
clear and logical manner.
The information presented does
not coincide with written
handouts given to participants.
What do I need?
Additional information that can
be used alongside other
methods of presentation
(acetates, slides, flipcharts, etc.),
not the same information.
Cards that have been
numbered or differentiated by
colour and put in a logical
order.
Concise and clear writing
Enough light to be able to read
the notes. Ideally a halogen
lamp on the table, with the light
directed downwards, so that it
does not affect the projector,
nor distract the audience.
To do a trial run so that you
can time the presentation and
make any other additional notes on the cards.
Multi-media
presentation
Advantages
Can be connected to a
computer or video player to
project both still and moving
images.
Makes presentations more
exciting.
Versatile.
You can use graphics more easily.
Flexible.
The same presentation can be
used over and over again.
presentation does not have their
back to the audience.
Short production time.
It allows different types of
presentation: video, information
prepared on a computer (with
or without effects), video
conference, etc. The image
projected can be seen on a wall,
back-cloth or a screen.
Disadvantages
Requires skill both in its
design and presentation.
Some audiences may not
accept it.
You need the room to
be dark, which makes it
difficult for participants
to make their own notes.
Dangers
Too many effects can
distract the audience
from the fundamental
point of the
presentation.
There is no visual or
graphic unity.
What do I need?
A script.
Technical resources to prepare the presentation.
A suitable room; that can be made dark, with
visibility for all participants and a screen or wall
to project the image onto.
Electricity.
Technical knowledge and skills
Equipment, cables and technical resources the
presentation requires (computer, video player,
telephone line, etc.)
A suitable table for the equipment.
A disc or cassette that contains the presentation.
115 / 204
116 / 204

Video
Advantages
Allows you to
record the
proceedings.
Enjoyable because
you can include
music, special and
sound effects
simultaneously.
It has impact.
Disadvantages
Very costly.
Particular technical
requirements.
It is lineal it has a
beginning, middle and
end, which cannot be
modified.
You cannot make any
verbal observations
during the presentation.
From the very moment
of pre-production the
process of producing the
schedule for the
presentation you have
to be very clear about
the structure of the
theme.
You need specific skills to
prepare it.
Dangers
The narration does
not coincide with
the presentation.
Logistical problems
hinder projection
(no extension
cable or
connection, power
cut, etc.).
What do I need?
A general script
A pre-production outline.
Production equipment
(camera, lights, microphones,
cables, cassettes or discs to
record onto).
Visualisation equipment to
make an inventory of the
images.
Post-production equipment.
Payment for music royalties (if
you are going to use music).
Presenter, editor, producer.
Transport.
A room suitable for a
projector and equipment
(multi-media projector,
television, video player, screen
or wall, etc.).
Computer
Presentation
Advantages
Easy to transport on a
floppy disc or CD.
Versatile, can be modified as
many times as necessary, the
order of frames can be
changed, new information
can be introduced, etc.
Widely available computer
programmes allow you to
include different effects in
movement, colour,
composition, etc. which has
a big impact on the
audience.
It can be interactive.
It does not require any
other manual skills other
than knowing how to use
that programme.
It can be projected by
different methods (a
monitor or video projector)
or printed on acetates or
transparencies and
presented through different
projection systems.
Disadvantages
Depending on the
type of projection
used, it can only be
used for smaller
groups.
Requires computer
skills.
As can happen with
acetates (that can also
be prepared by this
method), it highlights
ideas and concepts
through phrases or
lists. It is not suitable
for presenting long
paragraphs.
You need to hand out
printed information to
participants to include
what has been verbally
presented since the
room needs to be
dark thus making it
difficult for people to
make their own notes.
Dangers
Too many effects or
unnecessary effects
can distract attention
away from the
fundamental theme of
the presentation.
Lack of graphic unity.
Too much information.
Technical problems in
projection: the
programme being
used is not on the
computer at the
location, problems
with cable
connections, small
monitor, the video
projector does not
work, etc.
Using a presentation
prepared by
somebody else
without looking
through it first or
allowing time to
familiarise yourself
with it.
What do I need?
A script
A computer with the
appropriate programme.
Photographs, diagrams,
maps, logos, drawings, plans,
etc. and a scanner to load
them onto the computer.
A computer at the site of
the workshop that has the
same programme used to
produce the file and the
same fonts used in the
presentation.
Something to project the
presentation onto:
television, multi-media
projector and screen, backcloth or wall.
A suitable room: that can
be darkened and that
allows all participants to
clearly see the screen.
Outline for the person
making the presentation.
To do a trial run at the
venue before the actual
presentation.

Field trip or
Site visit
Advantages
Direct and genuine contact
with the experience that is
relevant to learning.
Interactive.
It favours participation and
contribution from those taking
part through spontaneous
questions.
Often, having a group site visit
is an irreplaceable part of the
training process.
There is no need for any
technical expertise apart from,
perhaps, being able to use a
megaphone.
Disadvantages
Both the hosts and the visitors
require an introduction before
the visit for it to be productive
and to reduce the risk of a
negative impact on site.
Careful preparation and
confirmation is required
shortly before the visit so that
appropriate conditions at the
site are in force.
The escort (trainer,
coordinator or person making
the presentation) needs to be
able to maintain cohesion in
the group during the visit.
Dangers
Transport problems.
Cultural conflict between visitors and host.
Time spent on the journey is greater than
the duration of the visit or excessive when
balanced with the benefits of the excursion.
The group has a negative impact on the
host.
Public order issues.
If it is a large space, the group can break up.
The site conditions have changed and the
visit loses its meaning because it is not what
was anticipated (a process, group of people,
procedure, etc.).
The megaphone distorts the sound and
does not fulfil its purpose.
The visit goes on for longer than planned.
The trainer is unable to maintain the main
purpose (the relevance of the visit with the
theme and with the workshop) and the
training activity becomes little more than a
tourist trip; a great deal of irreplaceable time
is lost as well as the whole concept of the
training.
What do I need?
Transportation.
A programme.
Instructions for how the
group should behave and a
timetable for the visit.
Map of the site.
A host who has been
informed and prepared for
the visit.
Confirmation of all the
minor but nevertheless
important details (food if it
is necessary, availability of
toilets, etc.).
A megaphone.
Important: a group should
be made aware beforehand
of what is suitable attire for
the visit (shoes, coats, hat,
waterproofs) and if it is
necessary to use insect
repellent or sunscreen, etc.
117 / 204
118 / 204

In all visualisation, the skill is to

convey the content of the message in
as few words and images as possible.
Take care, however, not to use isolated words that
make comprehension of the concept difficult.
Use visual methods that you can control. If you
are using a particular method for the very first
time, have a trial run beforehand and show your
presentation to somebody you trust to find out
their opinion, so that it can be adjusted and
refined.
Choose ways of visualisation that are
appropriate to the group of participants and
avoid using too many different methods. First,
because it takes a lot more organisation;
second, because there is a greater possibility of
encountering problems and third, because too
8.3.
Tools For Training
many changes can be tiresome for participants.

Remember that quantity is not synonymous
with quality. This is also relevant to the quality
and combination of colours you use. The most
spectacular and colourful is not always the
easiest to understand; use them to emphasise a
point and not to merely make an impression.
When using visuals, face the group and not
the screen or display board.
We are aware that there are circumstances when
you cannot use a visualisation tool that we have
recommended in this chapter. In such cases, there
are other ways of gathering information from
the workshop and producing documentation; for
example, recordings from work sessions,
presentations and discussions. This takes time
and requires discipline and commitment to bring
all the information together.
we introduce here should be accepted as possible

options to work alongside the specific focus for
From the beginning, we have said that participation is
participation. Each workshop is a unique event and
one of the essential points of focus of this manual. We
therefore the choice of tool will be subject to finding a
can also assure you that it is a challenge to achieve
balance among the following criteria:
participation, but one that can be successfully faced

by using a combination of factors; one of which is the
use of teaching aids.
The theme of the workshop and its content.

The type of information you want to obtain: quality
or quantity.
We have made a summary of the complementary tools

that can fulfil different training needs, and that you
The way you store the information you have
can improve with those you already know, with your
gathered: in its original format or simply a summary
own opinions or a combination of the two.
of what has happened.

The professional and personal profile of the
Which tool should you use?
participants: do they have the same profession,
Remember that there is no hard and fast rule; the tools
training or level of experience? Is it a heterogeneous

group? If it is mixed, what percentage is from each

group?
The size of the group of participants. There are tools
The physical space being used.

The level of knowledge and understanding the
training team has for using the tools.
that are useful for smaller groups but can lose their
impact and effectiveness in larger groups.
The availability of resources and materials

required to implement each tool.
The stage of the training process whether it is

introduced in the initial stage, the intermediary stage,
the advanced stage of the implementation of the
The needs of the participants will determine the
workshop or even at the final or post-workshop stage.
combination of tools used to allow higher levels of

participation and successful gathering of information
Specific needs; for example, working out problems,
when the different results are brought together.
giving alternatives or making decisions.

The time available for the exercise to be carried
out.
The cultural context in which the exercise is
developed.
You should take care not to put

across the feeling that you want to
make people participate, but these
tools are resources and therefore to
use one or the other is not the sole objective.
The most important thing is to meet the training
needs of those taking part; the use of
participation tools should be directed towards
this purpose.
Look to use tools you already know through
previous experience or a new one you have tried
and tested so you can be sure it will work. Never
improvise.
Before suggesting the use of one or other tool, we

recommend that you check beforehand what you
have and confirm the quantity and quality of
technical and logistical requirements available.
and look to improve your own tool box. By

doing this you respect and value your
participants and put into practice the principle
that learning is mutual.
Before actually applying the tool you have
chosen, make sure that the process is clear; you
will therefore create a relaxed atmosphere.
Show flexibility to adapt the chosen tool to
different circumstances in case it is necessary
to do so; be creative so you can make the most
of the opinions of those taking part. Look for
the opportunity to visualise objects, materials,
events, expected results, time and specific
If participants give alternatives to the tools and

methods you have put forward, do not be
annoyed; on the contrary, find out about them
recommendations for each activity; this will

help you to achieve your objectives with the
greatest precision.
119 / 204
120 / 204
HACER TALLERES
121 / 204
How
many
people ?
10 - 25
How long does

it take ?
In total:
10 - 50 minutes
Per person:
2 minutes
What materials do I need ?
Display board, flipchart and marker pens
What variations can it have ?
1. Instead of writing straight onto the

flipchart cards can be used, one for each
piece of information. Each person going
to the front fixes their card to the display board.
2. Working in pairs, participants can introduce themselves to each other.
3. If a very quick introduction is
required, ask participants to introduce
themselves with their name and an
adjective: for example, Sarah the Smiler,
John the Joker, etc.
What is its purpose ?
When is it used ?
To start the workshop and for

everybody to get to know one
another. With defined criteria you
can ensure that everyone gives and
receives the same basic
information.
At the beginning of the workshop
How is it used ?
1. Prepare a display board with
information that participants will
need to know; for example, name,
age, where they are from, marital
status, occupation, hobbies, dreams,
favourite book, favourite music, etc.
2. Put a certain amount of time aside
for each participant to write down
their details in the grid on entering
the room.
3. Afterwards, each participant
reads out and talks about their personal details to the rest of the group.
4. The display board remains visible throughout the whole workshop.
Other recommendations ?
The advantage of this presentation is that

it can be prepared before the workshop
begins, so that participants are kept
occupied filling out the grid.
You can include other information such
as the happiest day of my life, things
you do not like, what you most want in
the world, your fears, etc.
Name
From
Occupation
Role
Hobby
Dream
Participants introduce themselves Standard introduction
122 / 204
Participants introduce themselves The interview
How
many
people ?
10 - 25
How long does

it take ?
Interviews:
15 minutes
Presentation
made by each person
2 minutes
Paper to for taking down notes.
When is it used ?
To get to know one another at the

beginning of the workshop. This
tool serves as an ice-breaker,
allowing participants to talk about
the more personal aspects of their
lives and reach a deeper
understanding of the group.
At the beginning of the workshop.
How is it used ?
1. People organise themselves into pairs
2. The people in each pair interview one
another asking for interesting personal
details. Each pair does this in private.
1. Visualise information received on

cards that are placed onto a display
board during the presentation. At the
end a table is produced with
information about all the participants.
2. The amount of information you can
expect to obtain from the interview
will depend on the type of event and
the relevance of the information you
can have for the workshop.
Aim for pairs to be made up of

people who dont know each other
very well. If you notice that some of
the pairs are made up of people who
do already know each other well,
intervene to change the situation.
You can include standard
presentation information.
3. Each participant introduces their partner

to the whole group, using the
information they found out from their
private interview.
In total, it takes between 30 and 75
minutes to use this tool.
123 / 204
How
many
people ?
5 - 20
How long does

it take ?
Drawing:
10 minutes
Presentation by each
participant:
When is it used ?
To begin the workshop and for

people to get to know one
another; it also has the
advantage of encouraging
creativity and helping to break
the ice amongst participants.
At the beginning of the

workshop.
2 minutes
Paper, marker pens and pencils.
1. After drawing their own

pictures, participants can go into
pairs, interview one another and
introduce one another to the rest
of the group.
2. Instead of drawing a picture,
each participant can write a
sentence that they identify
themselves with.
This tool is also good to use to

begin a workshop where people
already know one another.
How is it used ?
1. Each participant is given a blank sheet of paper and
marker pens or pencils.
2. Each participant draws a picture that they feel
represents them.
3. A presentation is made and each participant shows
and explains their drawing.
This tool takes between 20 and 60 minutes: 10
minutes to draw the picture and a maximum of 2
minutes for each participant to show and explain it.
Participants introduce themselves The drawing
124 / 204
Participants introduce themselves Through illustrations
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Up to
To choose the pictures:
25
5 minutes
Presentation by
each participant
2 minutes
A lot of pictures (from calendars,

books, magazines, postcards, small
posters, etc) with different scenes:
landscapes, situations, people, objects...
For people to get to know one another

and to begin the workshop. It helps to
break the ice and the illustrations
encourage anecdotal narrative and
information that does not often surface
in a personal presentation. It is also good
for beginning a workshop where the
participants already know one another.
When is it used ?
At the beginning of the

workshop.
How is it used ?
1. Lots of pictures are spread out on a large table or on
the floor so that all of them can be seen.
2. Each person chooses three pictures that relate to their
personal experiences or in which they feel most
represented.
1. Depending on the number of

participants and the time available, you
can reduce the number of illustrations
to one or two per person.
3. Each participant gives a brief introduction, stating

name, occupation, etc.; at the end they show the
pictures they have chosen and say why.
2. Ask participants to choose the

picture they like the best and a picture
they like the least and explain why.
This tool takes between 30 and 60 minutes: 5 minutes

to choose the pictures and maximum 2 minutes for
each participant to present them.
3. After choosing pictures, participants

get into pairs, interview one another
and present their partner to the rest of
the group.
1. It is important to have pictures that

are different in theme and motive; the
more diverse the pictures, the more
dynamic the result will be.
2. Pictures should be big enough to
be visible to the people in the whole
group.
125 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
To draw the shield:
5 - 25
5 minutes
Presentation by each
participant:
3 minutes
Paper and marker pens or pencils.
1. The different aspects of the task

can be determined by the whole
group or each person can choose
their own.
2. The shield can represent the
project the participant is working on.
When is it used ?
To start the workshop and for people to

get to know one another. It helps to break
the ice and gives the opportunity for
participants to talk in a creative manner
giving information that would not generally
emerge in a personal introduction. It is also
good to start a workshop where the
participants already know one another.
At the beginning of a workshop.
How is it used ?
1. Each person receives a blank piece of paper and draws
a shield split into 4 sections.
2. Each section represents a significant aspect of their life:
occupation, personal interests, family, etc.
3. Participants draw a symbol in each section to represent
that aspect of their life.
4. Each participant presents their shield to the rest of the
group and explains why they chose each symbol.
This tool takes between 20 and 60 minutes: 5 minutes to
draw the shield and 3 minutes for each participant to
present it.
3. Instead of drawing a symbol,

participants can write a sentence.
Childhood
Adolescence
Try to make participants feel free to

give information in a voluntary way;
for example, if somebody does not
wish to discuss their adolescence,
do not pressure them, present them
with an alternative.
Personal life
Professional life
Participants introduce themselves The Shield
126 / 204
Participants introduce themselves My life story
How
many
people ?
10 - 25
How long does

it take ?
To write the book:
When is it used ?
To start the workshop and for

people to get to know one
another.
At the beginning of the workshop.
10 minutes
Presentation by
each participant:
3 minutes
Paper and marker pens or pencils.
1. The trainer can collect the sheets

and read the books out loud. The
group guesses who wrote that book.
Afterwards, the author of the book adds
their own comments.
2. This is possible when participants
know one another.
This tool is also useful for beginning a

workshop where participants know
one another.
The books can be available throughout
the workshop for participants to read.
How is it used ?
1. Paper and pens or pencils are given to
participants.
2. Each participant chooses a title for their book
and writes down between 4 and 8 chapters
that represent their life, for example: infancy,
adolescence, working life, my family, my
neighbourhood, my city, my preferences, my
conflicts, my challenges, my loves, etc.
3. Each participant reads their book to the rest
of the group making additional comments if
necessary.
This tool takes between 60 and 90 minutes:
10 minutes to write the book and maximum
3 minutes for each participant to make their
presentation.
127 / 204
How
many
people ?
10 -25
How long does

it take ?
To draw the silhouette:
10 minutes
When is it used ?
For people to get to know one

another and to begin the
workshop. It is useful to break
the ice amongst participants.
At the beginning of a
workshop.
Presentation by
each participant:
2 minutes
Paper and pens..
1. After participants have drawn their

silhouettes, they can split into pairs,
interview one another and present their
partner to the whole group.
How is it used ?
1. Each participant is given a sheet of flipchart paper and a marker
pen.
2. Each participant chooses a silhouette and defines which aspect
is assigned to each body part: the head, for example, represents
the identity of the person (name, age, etc.); the hands, what the
person does; the heart, how the person feels; the stomach, what
expectations the person has; the waist, his or her fears, the hips,
challenges; the feet, where the person is going; etc.
3. Each participant draws a silhouette on their sheet of paper and
writes down key words next to each respective body part.
4. Each participant presents and explains their silhouette to the rest
of the group.
This tool takes between 40 and 60 minutes: 10 minutes to draw
the silhouette and maximum 2 minutes for each participant to
make their presentation.
This tool is also useful to start up a

workshop where the participants
already know one another.
Participants introduce themselves The Silhouette
128 / 204
Participants introduce themselves The ball of string
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
30 and 45
minutes
When is it used ?
For participants to introduce

themselves and learn the names
of the other members of the
group. It helps to break the ice.
It can be done at the beginning

of the workshop as a
presentation, later during the first
day or at the beginning of the
second day of the workshop.
10 - 25
A ball of string or wool.
1. As well as the names of the

participants, you can say something
else, like place of birth, place of work,
personal motto, etc.
2. Another possibility is that the person
throwing the ball of string asks a
question and the person who catches
it answers.
3. Once the web is formed, there can
be a period of reflection to consider
the implications of the collective task.
To avoid anybody letting go of the

string and ruining the exercise, warn
participants to hold on to the string
tightly.
How is it used ?
1. Participants form a circle.
2. The trainer takes a ball of string or wool, holds onto the
end of string and says his or her name and without letting
go of the string, throws the ball to another person in the
circle.
3. The person who catches the ball says his or her name,
holds onto the string and then throws the ball to another
participant. This sequence is repeated until everybody in
the circle is holding onto part of the string and a web has
been formed.
4. The person who ended up with the ball of string passes
it back to the person who threw it calling that persons
name and so on so that the web is unravelled and the
ball of string ends up complete again in the hands of the
trainer.
129 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
20-25
When is it used ?
For participants to get to know

one another; so that as well as
personal details, they find out
about some of each others particular skills.
45-60 minutes
Paper and pens
When you have a group experienced

in the theme of the workshop and
you want them to find out about the
skills and expertise of each
participant; this information helps to
organise groups in the workshop or
in the delegation of tasks surrounding
the theme.
1. Instead of working in pairs, each participant writes their own

classified advertisement and presents it. A portrait of the
participant can also be included on the sheet together with any
information from the Standard introduction (p 121).
How is it used ?
This exercise is similar to producing a classified
advertisement in a daily newspaper, detailing the skills
they possess to get the job they want. Each participant
chooses the skills they have that they want to draw
attention to, for example: number of years experience
in a particular field, the relevant training that person
has received to enable them to carry out the role,
the relationship they have with other organisations,
references, etc.
1. The group organises itself into pairs; each pair is
given two pieces of paper and pens.
2. The members in each pair interview one another
asking for personal details and the skills their partner
wishes to highlight.
3. Each person writes down the information about
their partner on one of the sheets of paper.
4. Each pair organises the information and prepares
to present it to the rest of the group.
5. The members in each pair make a presentation
one person about the other.
6. Displays are produced with this information and
are left visible throughout the workshop.
Excellent opportunity!
To employ an experienced
professional in the field of
food engineering.
Blanca Rosa Perales

5 years experience as instructor in National
Apprenticeship Service.
8 years teaching experience in the
Departmental Technical Institute of Antioch.
Member of the National Association of Food
Engineers.
Special Projects Coordinator for the
Association of Food Producers of
Cundinamarca, Colombia.
Enjoys dancing, eating and making friends.
Participants introduce themselves The classified ad
130 / 204
Participants introduce themselves Wanted posters
How
many
people ?
20-25
How long does

it take ?
Between:
60 and 90 minutes
When is it used ?
For participants to get to know

the other members of the
workshop.
When members of the group know

one another, with the aim of getting
them to know one another better.
During workshops that last for a
number of days, when training has
moved forward and you want to find
out the level of knowledge reached
by those taking part.
Sheets of paper designed for the

exercise, one for each participant,
pens and notice boards.
1. In workshops with small groups

(between 7 and 12 people) or people
from the same organisation or
workplace, the names of all participants
are written on separate slips of paper;
these slips of paper are folded over
and put into a hat so each participant
takes out a name at random.
2. Each person produces a poster
corresponding to the name they drew
from the hat and presents it to the rest
of the group; the person being
described or the rest of the group have
to guess who it is.
3. If required, you can add information
and all the posters should be hung up
in a visible place
How is it used ?
11. A poster needs to be prepared with space allocated to the required
information including: your likes or preferences, dislikes, what you wanted
to be but could not, birthplace or where you come from.
2. Each participant is given a sheet of paper following the above format as
illustrated below.
3. Each participant is asked to fill in the blanks with their own details, but
make them aware that they should leave the space for their name blank
(this is the key to the exercise)
4. The posters are collected in and redistributed amongst participants, making
sure that nobody receives their own poster.
5. Participants are asked to read the information on the poster and try to
make a mental guess as to the identity of the person.
6. Each participant reads the information to the rest of the group and says
who it is about and who the information corresponds to. If after reading out
these clues the person cannot be identified, each participant reads the
information out loud again and asks another participant to identify the
person in question.
7. Once that person is revealed, their name is written underneath the
photograph and they then pay the reward to the person who identified
them.
8. The posters are put up in a visible place until the end of the workshop.
As well as the aforementioned

information, we recommend you
include informal details to
complement the identity of the
person in question.
If the person is not identified
straightaway, the trainer should
look for ways to maintain order in
the group
WANTED
Likes
Dislikes
Things not many people know about him/her
Bom in
Lives in
Admires
Other information
131 / 204
How
many
people ?
10 - 30
How long does

it take ?
20-30 minutes
When is it used ?
The aim of the Famous couples

tool is to form pairs or groups of
participants at random and in an
enjoyable way.
At any point during the

workshop, so people can be
integrated in a dynamic way.
How is it used ?
Cards and pens or pencils
1. Cards are prepared with the names of well-known couples

(for example, Adam & Eve or Romeo & Juliet, etc.) or famous
people from the same category (singers, actors, sporting
heroes, writers, etc.)
1. Instead of famous people, you could

use animals of the same type or cities
in the same region or country, or other
similar categories.
If the trainer already knows the group

and notices that the pairs are made up
of people who already know each
other, it is worth suggesting they
change partner.
2. Participants randomly choose a card and ask who has

the corresponding card or cards to make up the pair or
group. For example, the person that picks out the card with
Romeo looks for the person with Juliet or the person who
picks out the name of a famous singer searches among the
group for others with singers on their cards.
Ursa Minor
tra
ollu x
Ant
a
P
p
ho ny
eo
Cl
Adam
n
Su
or
M aj
a
s
r
U
Eve
Mo
on
y
d
Har
Laurel
Making up pairs and organising groups Famous couples
132 / 204
Making up pairs and organising groups The animal chorus
How
many
people ?
10 - 30
How long does

it take ?
5-10 minutes
When is it used ?
The Animal Chorus tool helps

people form into pairs and helps
to break the ice.
At any point in the workshop,

to integrate people in an active
way.
How is it used ?
Cards and pens or pencils
1. Choose as many animals as there are groups

or pairs, preferably animals that have an
obvious sound or movement, for example,
dog, cat, cockerel, snake, monkey, etc.
1. Give out as many cards as there are

groups (four, five, etc.) to the same
number of people who will be leader of
each group. Instruct them to make the
sound or typical movement of the animal
that appears on their card. The other
participants in the workshop are given a
card with a picture or the name of an
animal for the corresponding group.
2. The sound or movement for each animal is the key to participants forming a
group.
If the trainer knows the group already and

notices that the pairs are made up of
people who already know one another,
try to intervene and suggest they swap
round.
2. Make up cards with names or pictures of these

animals.
3. Each participant receives a card at random.
To find their group or pair, they should imitate
the sound or movement made by the animal
on their card. All participants in the workshop
do the same thing to find and join up with
the corresponding group or partner.
133 / 204
How
many
people ?
10 - 30
How long does

it take ?
When is it used ?
For participants to split into pairs

or groups at random.
At any time during the

workshop, to integrate
participants in an active way.
5-10 minutes
How is it used ?
Cards, pens or pencils
1. Each saying or proverb is in two parts:

An apple a day
keeps the doctor away.
A stitch in time
saves nine.
Early to bed
early to rise.
1. Use closed containers (for example, the

small plastic containers that rolls of camera
film come in). You need as many containers
as participants. Every pair of containers
needs to have the same contents: seeds,
paper clips, coins, pebbles, drawing pins,
a liquid, paper balls, pins, etc.
2. The containers are handed out at
random to the participants who then shake
them; the pair is formed by finding another
person with the same sound in their container.
If the trainer knows the group already

and notices that the pairs are made up
of people who already know one
another, suggest they change with
another pair.
Choose the same number of sayings as there are pairs in

the group.
2. Split each saying between two cards: the first part of the
saying on one card and the second part on another. Hand
them out at random.
3. Each participant reads aloud their half of the saying and
then listens out for the other half.
Making up pairs and organising groups Proverbs and sayings
134 / 204
Making up pairs and organising groups Two ends of a thread
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 - 30
When is it used ?
The two ends of a thread tool

is used to make up pairs or
groups at random.

5-10 minutes
A ball of string and a pair of scissors
1. To make up groups make knots one

knot for group A, two for group B, three
for group C, etc. in the middle of each
of the pieces of string, making sure that
they are hidden in the trainers hand, who
keeps hold of them whilst participants
choose an end of a piece of string.
2. When each participant has an end, the
trainer releases the pieces of string and
the participants know which group or pair
they are part of according to the number
of knots.
If the trainer already knows the

group and notices that pairs are
being made up of people who
already know one another, suggest
they change with another pair.
How is it used ?
1. Cut as many pieces of string as there
are pairs or groups.
2. The trainer takes the pieces of string and
holds them so that each end of the pieces
of string is hanging down.
3. Each participant takes the end of a piece
of string and makes up a pair with the
person who has the other end to that
piece. Members of each pair find out who
they are with when the trainer releases
the strings.
135 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
When is it used ?
To make up pairs and groups at

random.

10 - 30
5-10 minutes
How is it used ?
Postcards, cards and scissors
1. You need postcards or cards

the same number as pairs or
groups.
1. Write words or phrases relating to

the theme of the workshop on cards
and cut them into irregular or random
shapes. Pairs are formed when the two
parts to each card are put together.
2. Each card is cut into two parts

(if it is to form pairs) or into as
many parts as the number of
people required for each group.
3. Each participant is given a piece
of a card at random. There
should be no pieces left over.
4. Participants look to match their
card to form a pair or a group.
If the trainer already knows the group

and notices that pairs are made up of
people who already know one another,
suggest they change with others.
Making up pairs and organising groups The jigsaw puzzle
136 / 204
Gathering together ideas or opinions The selection of options
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
30-45 minutes
5-25
Display boards, paper, marker

pens and cards.
When is it used ?
To quickly establish the level of

preferences participants have
about the different options being
discussed.
After a brainstorming session or

when problems and possible
solutions are identified. When
there are a number of options
and only one or a few are
needed.
The exercise helps to prioritise and

also to reveal to what extent there
is agreement or disagreement
about a theme or subject
How is it used ?
1. Write ideas or options you are going to discuss on cards (in
the example each idea is given a letter a, b, c, etc.)
2. The criteria for the discussion should be made clear, and all
options should be considered when deciding.
1. If preferred, a secret ballot can take

place where participants write their
opinion on a card and put it in a bag.
2. Another option is for each
participant to have three votes that they
can cast as they see fit; this is presuming
that there are more than three options
in total otherwise there would be a
draw.
The facilitator should observe

proceedings and guide discussions, as
it is easy to slip into repetition.
3. We recommend that participants vote (by marking an x in

the box that corresponds to an opinion or idea) and that
when they vote they consider all the criteria given.
4. The trainer explains the rules of the game for the vote how
and in what order voting takes place and participants then
mark an x next to their option.
5. Ideas or options are arranged according to the number of
votes they received, from the largest to the smallest vote.
6. The result is given and the group decides whether it will go
ahead with the option chosen.
Criteria 1 ........................................................
Criteria 2 ......................................................................
Criteria 3 ..............................................................
Criteria 4 ...........................................................................................
Idea / option -c
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Idea / option -b
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Idea / option -a
xxxxxxx
Idea / option -e
xxxx
Idea / option -f
xxx
Idea / option -d
137 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 25
15 - 45 minutes
When is it used ?
To quickly gain relevant and varied

information in the group as a whole
or in smaller groups. Themes are
open and the aim is to gather all the
ideas together.
When collective ideas regarding

the perceptions and reactions of
the participants are required about
a particular subject. When you
want to introduce a theme or
subject.
How is it used ?
Flip chart, pens and cards.
1. The theme is decided upon and presented and the main question
is written up so that it is on view throughout the exercise.
1. Each participant is given a pen and

cards. As soon as they have put forward
their idea, they write it down on a card
and fix it onto the display board
themselves.
2. Subsequently, small groups can be
formed that choose a few ideas from
all those on the board and discuss how
these proposals can be put into
practice.
Participants need to feel free to

express their opinions, thus requiring an
open, informal and positive atmosphere.
All participants must comply with the
rules of the game and avoid any type of
action that inhibits the spontaneity of the
group members.
To avoid more than one person
talking at the same time, the facilitator
can have participants take turns to make
their contribution; this reduces the risk
of losing valuable ideas or opinions and
allows shy members of the group to
participate.
Participants will need time to warm
up and become enthusiastic in
expressing new and unusual ideas.
If the flow of ideas begins to dry up,
it is important to carry on. Usually, it is
from this point that really new and
innovative ideas are produced.
2. The rules of the game are explained.

All ideas are accepted, no matter how silly or irrational they might
seem.
No criticism is allowed of any idea put forward.
Each person can put forward as many ideas as they wish, the more
the better.
3. A timescale is set for the brainstorming session.
4. One or two people are given the task of noting the ideas down on
a flipchart or board in clear writing that is big enough to be
legible so they will be visible to the group as a whole. There are
no restrictions on any contribution, so participants can be creative
and produce unusual and innovative ideas.
5. When the time limit is up, ideas are analysed and conclusions
made.
6. The display board can be used as a resource to initiate the use of
other planning tools.
Gathering together ideas or opinions The brainstorming session
138 / 204
Gathering together ideas or opinions The poll by cards
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
5 - 25
30 and 60 minutes
depending on the
number of participants.
Cards, display boards and a pen for each

person.
1. The number of cards given to each

participant can be limited.
2. When people are satisfied that they
have finished writing their cards they can
go and place them where they consider
most appropriate, grouping them with
others already fixed to the board.
What is its
purpose ?
To
collect
opinions,
information or
ideas from the
group.
When is it used ?
With the group as a whole or in smaller groups, this

tool gives everybody the opportunity to participate
and every idea or opinion is valued. It is therefore
ideal to use when there are some shy people and
other more dominant individuals, or when there is
some sort or hierarchy created; for example, a group
of managers and subordinates.
How is it used ?
1. The question for the group to resolve is formulated
and written on a display board.
2. Each participant is given a pen and as many cards as
they need.
3. A time limit is set for participants to fill out the cards.
4. The cards are collected and then shuffled to maintain
anonymity.
5. The cards are read out and shown to the group.
6. As they are read out, the participants help group
them by theme on the display board.
1. Before starting the task, it is important

to explain the rules that determine what
is written on the cards.
2. You should be sensitive when grouping
the cards together and ensure that you
consider the suggestions made by
participants. It is the group that decides
where each card should be placed, not
the trainer.
3. If a card cannot be obviously put into
a specific category, make copies of it and
place them under various thematic groups.
4. There will be repetition in the cards,
but this repetition will underline the
importance of an idea.
7. Finally, each group or set of cards is given a title

one word or a key sentence.
Question...................
Key
word/title
Key
word/title
Key
word/title
Key
word/title
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
Idea
139 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 - 30
Between
30 and 40 minutes
When is it used ?
To obtain an opinion
about a theme or a
problem with the
participation of all
members of the group.
When participation is one sided or the group

has come to a collective mental block. As
there is no preparation required with this
tool, it can be used at any point during the
workshop. It is done in pairs so that even
the more timid members of the group
participate in the conversation.
How is it used ?
Flipchart or display board.
1. A clear and concise question is formulated on a

chosen topic.
2. Participants pair up to talk about the questions.
1. Instead of pairs, groups of three or

four can also be formed.
2. You can introduce another step
halfway: after speaking in pairs, two
sets of pairs join together to exchange
and discuss their ideas and reach
conclusions. The conclusions can then
be presented to the whole group.
To avoid wasting a lot a time getting

into pairs, the trainer can instruct
participants to pair up with the person
sitting next to them.
The question must be precise and
any doubts or misunderstandings
addressed before the simultaneous dialogues start so that each pair talks about
the theme in hand as opposed to
discussing what they think they should
be doing.
3. Each pair talks quietly (or whispers!) for 5 minutes

maximum 15 minutes exchanging ideas and
opinions with the aim of reaching a mutual
solution or opinion.
4. The whole group joins together and each pair
puts forward their ideas and conclusions.
5. The whole group continues to work using these
results.
Gathering together ideas or opinions Whispered or simultaneous dialogues
140 / 204
Gathering together ideas or opinions Group Rotation
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
12 - 25
1 and 2 hours
Cards, pens, display boards and enough space for

groups to be positioned and to move around
(ideally one room per group).
When is it used ?
For all participants to

discuss various aspects of
a theme in greater depth.
It also allows all those
taking part to make their
own contributions in
moderate time.
At any point in the workshop

when all participants need to
have the opportunity to give
their opinion on a subject. It
makes it easier for
participants to take on the
results as their own.
How is it used ?
1. When one person changes group they briefly

explain to the next group what their group has
produced. After this presentation, they return to
their original group.
2. The time limit can be reduced for each round
as groups are working on what has already been
worked on by others (for example, the first round
is 45 minutes long, the second 30, the third and
fourth only 20 minutes).
3. If there is not enough time and it is not vital
that everybody has the chance to pass on their
information and ideas about all the subjects being
discussed, the number of rotations can be reduced
(for example, each sub-group works on only two
themes).
4. Another simpler option is for all participants to
work on their question using a sheet of paper and
sitting in their place; the sheet is circulated (with
the respective question) until everyone has written
their opinion on all the sheets being circulated
around the room.
1. You need a topic; formulate central issues or questions, one for

each group, and write them up so they are visible to all.
6. When the last round has taken place, participants should come
together and then one representative from each group briefly
presents the findings put forward by all the groups on the last
question or display board which their group discussed.
1. It is important that the process is made

completely clear at the beginning, so it is worth
writing down these instructions and displaying
them throughout the exercise.
2. For this task the group needs to know how to
work with and layout thoughts on the cards,
because from the second round, each sub-group
will be working on a card that already has
contributions from the previous groups. If there
are groups which find this technique difficult, it is
worth choosing one person to take responsibility
for writing on the card.
2. Participants should be split into groups of between 3 and 5

people. For the purpose of this explanation, we will call the groups
G1, G2, G3, G4, etc.
3. Each group works on one issue or question relating to the
central theme, writing down their contributions.
4. When the pre-determined time limit has elapsed for the first
round, each group leaves their work and goes on to another groups
work they physically swap places with other groups: G1 moves
to the board that has been made up by G2; G2 goes to where G3
was, and so on. The groups have a second discussion round and
write down and display their outcomes.
5. You need to have as many discussion rounds as necessary for
all the groups to work on all the questions. The way in which
topics are rotated between the groups is explained in the diagram
on the next page.
7. When all the presentations have been made, there should be a

brief discussion about the presentations and conclusions made in
an effort to reach a consensus of opinion. The conclusions are
written up and a final summary is made.
The time required for this exercise depends on the number of
groups and how in depth you want the discussion on the theme
to go.

How is it used ?
First
round
(to move on to
the next round,
the groups move
on one)
Whole group
Second
round
(to move on to
the next round,
the groups move
on one)
Group Rotation
A, B, C and D are the display boards on
which the groups write their thoughts and
each board corresponds to one issue or
to a group of issues which are going to
be discussed. Ideally, groups change
rooms every time they move on to the
next round or display board instead
of moving the display boards for each
round.
Third
round
(to move on to
the next round,
the groups move
on one)
Fourth
round
Whole group
(when the activity has

been completed, everyone
returns to the
main conference
room)
141 / 204
142 / 204
Gathering together ideas or opinions The fish tank
How many
pople ?
How long does

it take ?
1 - 2 hours:
12 25
Group discussions:
15 - 30 minutes
Discussions in the fish tank
30 minutes
Whole group discussion:
20 - 45 minutes
When is it used ?
To achieve full participation when

dealing with a more complex theme
or debate. It allows participants to
listen to and consider other peoples
arguments. It is used to apply
negotiation skills and to analyse the
validity of the arguments put
forward by different people in a
discussion.
When you want to observe and

consider the many different points
of view posed by the arguments and
behaviour of the different sides in a
discussion. There are different ways
to apply this particular tool,
depending on your objective. It is
suitable for large groups.
How is it used ?
Paper, pencils and lots of space.
1. Decide on a theme, a procedure and a time limit.
1. The delegates can change their role

with another member of the group if
there is a time when they feel ill at ease
or do not know how to continue.
2. Participants are divided into groups which work on the theme by

adding their own arguments for discussion and their strategies to defend
them. They choose one person to act as delegate, who will be in charge
of negotiating their arguments through the strategies chosen by the rest
of their group (as shown in the diagram below).
3. All participants in the workshop join together again, sitting in two
concentric circles. The delegates or negotiators sit in the inner circle; the
other members of the group sit in the bigger circle, behind their delegate
(as shown below on the right hand side of the diagram).
2. There can be an additional chair

placed in the inner circle. If somebody
from the outer circle wishes to intervene
or take part in the discussion, he/she
takes the seat for a set time.
4. The delegates start up the discussion while the other members of the
groups listen carefully; this process should not last for more than 30
minutes. If someone from the outer circle wishes to intervene, they can
only do so in writing, by passing comments to the groups delegate
without speaking.
5. At the end of the presentation and negotiation session, the entire

group comes together to analyse the discussion, bearing in mind what
arguments were not put forward, which ones might have been suggested
and what strategies had been proposed to build the case for each
argument, according to the focus established at the beginning. The
following diagram is an example of how the chairs could be set out and
also demonstrates the dynamic of the meetings.
The benefits of using this tool greatly

depend on the analysis made at the
end of the task. Therefore, we
recommend that participants are clear,
right from the start, on what the main
focus of the exercise is: its content, or
rather, the validity of argument the
negotiators or delegates abilities and
their strategies.
Delegate
143 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
At least:
45 minutes
When is it used ?
To gather information or round off

a subject in a large group. To
quickly evaluate an activity or
proposal and reach an agreement
involving members of the whole
group.
When you wish to know

suggestions, opinions or
information from a large group of
people in a short space of time,
ensuring maximum participation.
It is used to gather information
without debate because opinions
are collected but not discussed.
More than
18
Flipchart or display board and enough

space for each group to discuss the
subject without disturbing other groups.
1. Groups can be given up to 15 minutes

instead of 6; but if more time is given,
there is a risk that a debate will start,
instead of gathering new opinions and
information which is the main objective
of this tool.
1. The theme being developed with this

tool should not be for debate but for
information
How is it used ?
This tool is called the Phillips 66 because each group has 6 members
and 6 minutes to respond to the question.
1. An explanation of the task and the ultimate objective should be
given to participants.
2. A subject and a question are formulated to which the groups will
have to respond.
3. Participants divide into groups of 6 people. Each group chooses: a
coordinator whose job is to remind the rest of the group about the
time limit and allow each member of the group to put forward their
ideas; a secretary who takes notes and writes down any conclusions
to present to the others in the workshop.
4. Groups have 6 minutes to respond to a question. Then the group
discusses what has been put forward and tries to reach an agreement.
The conclusion is drafted and then written up by the secretary.
5. All members of the workshop join together and the secretary from
each group briefly (one minute for each secretary) explains their groups
conclusions (mentioning any differences of opinion, if there were any).
6. The secretaries presentations are summarised on a display board
or a blackboard.
7. A general conclusion is reached.
The following diagram is an example of how the chairs could be set
out for the group task:
2. The question asked at the beginning

of the task should produce a list of
answers: for example: What factors
influence, Mention the causes of,
etc.
Coordinator
Secretary
Gathering together ideas or opinions Phillips 66
144 / 204
Making an analysis Exchanging experiences
How many
people ?
10 - 25
How long
does it take ?
21/2 hours
When is it used ?
For participants to get to know,

exchange, strengthen, compare and
evaluate their experiences of the topic.
When you wish to systematise and

exchange experiences, become
aware of practical processes and learn
about them.
up to 1 day
1. Several different rooms for the

groups (preferably one room for
each topic), that are joined together
or close to one another; tables and
other equipment for participants to
use and display their materials. If
there is one large room, there
should be enough space between
the groups to avoid disturbances.
2. Visual and audiovisual
equipment and material for the
stands.
1. Other people can be invited; for

example, participants colleagues or
representatives from other
organisations who may be
interested in the theme.
2. If the workshops main aim is to
share experiences, there should be
enough time available to make an
in-depth study of each presentation.
The preparation of each experience

is important; therefore participants
must be advised beforehand what
they can use in the creative design
of their materials, to devise a
presentation accompanied by
music, paint themselves, wear a
disguise or illustrate an experience
in an artistic way.
How is it used ?
1. Before the workshop: participants should be sent a form that they fill out and
send back before the start of the workshop (by fax or e-mail) so that the trainer has
a general idea of the experiences they will bring to the workshop; the experience
exchange is designed with this information. Participants are requested to bring
materials and visual representations of their experiences according to what they
put on the form. The completed form should include the name of the experience
and materials that will be produced and taken to the workshop to convey the
situation or problem the project is tackling, the context in which it will be developed,
the protagonists, methods used, main learning purpose, results achieved, strengths
and weaknesses, etc.
2. Experiences are then grouped by theme and each group is given a space,
preferably a separate room. We suggest forming 4 or 5 groups.
3. Participants individually prepare and organise the presentation of their own
experience on display boards.
4. Each participant presents their experience to their respective group. For example,
members of the group discussing theme A meet in their room, share their experiences
and receive opinions and comments from the other members in that group; all
groups do the same thing in their own rooms. Each presentation should take
around 10 to 15 minutes. By this time each participant has revealed and has been
introduced to experiences relating to their work.
5. Once these presentations are over, each member of the thematic group, in their
respective space, organises their stand to exhibit to the public and prepares for
the next stage.
6. Each group in turn stages an Information Exhibition in which each topicgroup has 30 minutes, divided equally between its members, for their individual
presentations; the other groups take the role of visitors. A bell or signal will announce
the end of each session.
Each exhibitor should think up ways to attract the visitors or buyers to their stand,
offering their products, videos, leaflets, stickers, etc, that can be acquired through
an exchange or a purchase; the buyers are free to visit one or another as often
as they like. This process is repeated until all the topic-groups have exhibited. At
the end of this exercise, each participant should know other participants experiences
in greater detail.
7. To conclude the exercise, all participants should meet in full session to evaluate
the task and the results.
145 / 204
How many
people ?
10 - 25
How long
does it take ?
2 - 3 hours
In the play:
To understand a theme or subject in

more depth, because participants
reconstruct or act out real or fictitious
situations. Each participant is given a
role.
3-8
1. A situation that lends itself to

role-play, in other words, that
rounds off the topic of the
workshop and that allows people
to see the different aspects and
levels of reaction.
2. Any documentation relating to
the situation (information and
instructions). Ensure that it is
ordered and clear.
3. Enough unobstructed space.
4. Any materials required for the
role-play.
1. You can play the same scene

over and over in the same
situation, experimenting with
behaviour patterns, ways of
reacting and also different endings.
It is important to point out that

when you are talking about the
most realistic representation
possible, comedy is excluded. The
main aim of the exercise is to
identify different ways of reacting
to a given situation and even
change them.
When is it used ?
When you want to encourage

creativity; especially when you wish
the group to make an in depth
exploration of their attitudes, conflicts
and positions regarding a topic, and
to challenge participants to act and
react in a different way than normal.
How is it used ?
1. A situation that
represents the theme in
question is prepared. It
can be real or imaginary
although it should be
created around an actual
case or situation.
2. Instructions are
produced for the
different roles in the situation
characters with specific functions, pre-determined behaviours, reactions
and positions. These roles will be represented in the play and included in
the general information handed out to all the participants.
3. The situation that will be acted out is presented to all those taking part in
the workshop. The instructions and general information about the task are
handed out.
4. Each participant is given a role they will recreate in the play and more
specific instructions are given to each person.
5. Each actor is asked to play their part in the most realistic way possible
and according to the particular instructions they received. The rest of the
group makes up the audience and is asked to carefully observe and make
notes on the behaviour, reactions and arguments of the different characters.
6. After everyone has read and understood the situation and the instructions,
the play starts.
7. When the play is over, the situation is evaluated from the notes made by
the audience regarding the attitudes, ways of thinking and reactions of
each character; it is made clear which instructions were given to each actor;
then the situation and what has been learned from it are linked with the
themes of the workshop.
Introducing the exercise takes between 10 and 15 minutes, preparing and
presenting the play takes an hour, and then another hour for comments and
evaluations.
Making an analysis Role-play
146 / 204
Making an analysis The conceptual map
How many
people ?
How long
does it
take ?
Can be done
individually or
in groups
It depends on
how complex
the subject is.
What materials do I
need ?
Flipchart and different

coloured pens if working in
groups; when working
individually, one sheet of
paper and pencils.
What variations can

it have ?
1. As the Mind map is a

visualisation aid, it can have
a number of applications. In
this example each idea gives
origin to two new ideas, but
they could be three or one
The end result of the map
itself is the same regardless
of the processes used.
When is it used ?
The Mind map is used to visually

demonstrate the thought process on a chosen
subject, through stimulating both sides of the
brain (learning). It is used to record ideas and
the routes of association that arise from the
group task.
When you need to visually

demonstrate a brainstorm of ideas,
make individual or group plans
and come up with solutions to
problems; it allows a meeting or a
creative process to be written up
and made available for all to view.
How is it used ?
Human Brain
Left
The Mind map is a technique used to
hemisphere
visualise a thought process. Tony Buzan
Linear
invented this technique based on the schools
Logic
of thought prevalent in the Seventies. Mind
Mathematics
Analysis
mapping is based on the interaction of both
Reasoning
Attention to
sides of the brain (right and left); this
detail
communication strengthens the inherent
Figures
Language
abilities of each one of them, so that results
Progress
achieved are more creative than those using
lineal thought (in which only one side of the brain is used).
Similar
Original
Magic
Illusion
Trick
Workshop
Expert
Role
Makeup
Repair
Technician
Skills
Colour
Replacement
Nut
You will achieve better results

from Mind map if you have
used it before. It is therefore
useful to practise Mind
mapping before using it in
the workshop.
Global
Feelings
Intuition
Aesthetics
Emotions
Synthesis
Fantasy
Metaphors
Spontaneity
Images
The map, a schematic drawing with multiple branches, has a central theme that acts
as a starting point, written in the middle. Branches inspired by associations made by
participants sprout from the centre. Each branch can lead to a flow of new ideas,
which are written down as key words, symbols or pictures.
Tool
Right
hemisphere
Work
Decoration
Adjustment
System
Order
To oil
Beauty
Grace
IMPROVE
Surprise
Chilli
peppers
Tears
Fleeting
Spicy
Seasoning
Serenity
Harmony
Coordination
Increase
Stars
Height
Taste
Giant
Goliath
David
Multiplication
Shiny
Grow
Salt
Taste
Virtuous
Talent
Mechanism
Germinate
Senses
Sauce
Result
Procreate
Orchestra
Fall
Be born
Rhythm
Deliver
End
Product
147 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
10 - 25
Divided into
groups of
2 hours
and 1 day
4-5
When is it used ?
To observe a particular situation and

draw conclusions that can be generalised
or applied to similar situations. It
reinforces what has already been learned
because it allows the application of
knowledge and tools that have been
used during the workshop in the search
of specific solutions.
When you wish to analyse a

scenario, incident or situation.
How is it used ?
A well documented case that is relevant

to the theme of the workshop.
1. Choose a real scenario related to the workshop theme and a suitable

methodology for the abilities and interests of the participants.
2.
1. The case study can be combined with

a field trip, role-play game or simulation.
2. The case study can be used in
subsequent sessions or other sessions
with different subjects.
3. After the whole group has reached
a conclusion, experts or those
experienced in the case can give their
evidence of how the actual case was
resolved; thus participants can evaluate
their own solutions.
Material presented or handed out

should be summarised, it should contain
information about the case and all those
involved in it.
Instructions given to participants
should be clear and enough time should
be allocated to the task for it to be carried
out effectively.
The key to the exercise is being
completely clear about its main objective.
This must be considered when choosing
the case study, the appropriate
methodology and working groups.
Materials should be prepared in a way that allows participants to:

See the relevance to the theme of the workshop.
See the complexity of the situation.
Understand the dynamics of the specific process.
Understand the motives, actions and reactions of those involved.
3. Present the case study to the participants in full session; give clear
instructions to analyse the chosen scenario and seek possible solutions.
4. Participants work on the case in groups. All groups can either begin
using the same approach or different groups can look from different
perspectives.
5. All groups present their results visually to the other groups so that
they serve as a basis for evaluating the case.
6. The whole group draws up conclusions to the results that have
been presented; if possible, these conclusions can be adapted or applied
to other similar cases.
Making an analysis The case study
148 / 204
Making an analysis Simulation
How many
people ?
10-25
How long does

it take ?
Between
1/2 day
and 2 days
What materials do I
need ?
Plenty of information about a

real case. If possible, a number
of rooms for groups to meet
and
discuss
without
interruptions. One or more
people who have detailed
knowledge of the simulation.
What variations can
it have ?
1. The exercise can be

supported by the use of
computers and programmes
that quickly demonstrate the
consequences of decisions
made by the groups or supply
new information derived from
these decisions. Another aid
can be field trips.
To comprehensively analyse an actual

theme, situation or conflict, observing
behaviours from different points of view
and looking for changes in attitude
towards a problem. It is an experimental way of learning.
When is it used ?
When you want participants to develop

their abilities through the exercise and
apply what has been learned in the
workshop to a real situation about which
they ask: what happened? Why did it
happen? and what can be done?
How is it used ?
1. Choose a real scenario that you know well and that can be simplified without
losing its validity.
2. Present the case clearly and comprehensively, explain that the aim of the
exercise is not to win or find a solution, but to learn through experimentation.
3. Identify and assign the different roles in the case to each group roles or
characters with functions, behaviours, reactions and given situations.
4. Present and hand out information to each group according to the role they
will represent, explain their situation and the tasks that need to be carried out.
5. Each group prepares its role for the simulation according to the instructions
they received and the tasks they were assigned: describe any assumptions that
can be made and positions that can be taken, until you can formulate questions
that help you to improve the level of information, clear up any doubts, give
foundation to any assumptions and make decisions.
6. Carry out the first simulation session: each person in the case, in accordance
with the role they have been assigned, actively participates according to the
order of the presentations, time and agreed rules of the game. You should have
decided earlier whether there is enough time for questions. This meeting ends
with a summary that includes proposals from each of those taking part.
7. New and additional information is given about the case.
This tool is not advisable for

use in short workshops.
8. Groups go back and prepare the next simulation session, using the new
information given on the case and the results from the first session.
For the exercise to be

successful, it is important to
prepare the case and all its
possible variations beforehand.
9. The second simulation session takes place. When this session is over, more
information is given and so on, until the exercise is completed.
When dealing with a real

scenario, be careful with
procedure and any possible
results; this does not affect the
exercise which aims to show
the process of a case study
rather than search for solutions.
10. Finally, results from the simulation are discussed and evaluated by all
participants; participants produce new conclusions and both the positive and
negative aspects of the exercise are evaluated; for example, with the help of
questions.
What were the main strengths from the meetings? What would you do different
in future? How was your role perceived during simulation? How were other
peoples roles perceived? What behaviours and reactions were generated by the
behaviour of others? How did behaviours and reactions change when new
information was presented? How did you feel after the experience? etc.
149 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 - 25
1/2 day
and 1 1/2 days
Entre
1. Previous knowledge of the area and

of the circumstances of the destination.
2. Plenty of time before the trip,
confirmation of contacts at the site and
a day and time when the excursion will
take place.
3. At least one local person who can
serve as a guide and answer the
participants questions.
4. Appropriate transport, food,
accommodation, etc. if required.
5. To choose the most relevant tasks
for the case and decide on groups.
6. Material to be used by the small
groups to present to the whole group.
7. Pre-prepared handouts with the main
objective of the exercise, the tasks and
a timetable for the excursion.
1. Instead of a field trip, you can make

an informative visit, the main purpose
of which is a talk by an expert from
the place visited about the subject of
interest.
If the visit is not carefully prepared, it

can lose the advantages that justify it
and the group could become very
dissatisfied.
It offers participants the opportunity

to get to know the location, the
experience or the case and link the
theme of the workshop with a
specific situation; it implements and
verifies the tools or methods used
and it visually illustrates what has
been learned; it changes the format
and routine of the workshop.
When is it used ?
It is useful to have a field trip during

the second half of the workshop; not
just to change the pace of the
workshop, but so that participants can
take advantage of what they have
already learned. The trip also gives time
for reflection and a rest when it is
planned simply to obtain cultural or
natural wealth of the area.
How is it used ?
1. Before the workshop find a suitable location and organise and prepare the excursion carefully considering the theme that is to be developed.
2. Give the group an outline of the trip, objectives and material or
information on the background of the situation being analysed.
3. Explain the tasks created for the visit; for example, a quick poll about
the environmental aspects of the area.
4. Define rules surrounding the introduction of the group to the
organisation being visited, the people who will be interviewed there and
the type of relationship participants will have with them; this avoids any
expectations that cannot be fulfilled.
5. Create groups of between 3 and 5 people depending on the tasks and
number of participants. The groups prepare for the trip: divide the work
and plan the best way to carry out the exercise and all its objectives.
6. When the visit starts, remind everybody about time limits set for tasks
and agreed rules.
7. When the excursion has finished, groups analyse the data gathered
and prepare a presentation to show the results of their collective thoughts.
The analysis can be supported with other tools.
8. All groups make their presentations in front of the whole group, they
then draw up conclusions and finish by evaluating the trip.
Making an analysis The excursion or field trip
150 / 204
Making an analysis SWOT analysis
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 - 25
90 minutes
up to
1 day
When is it used ?
At any point in the workshop when

you need to make decisions about the
advantages or disadvantages of a
situation or when you want to analyse
the potential, possibilities and
difficulties of a particular case or
organisation.
Display boards, cards, pens; if you

prefer, the display board can be
prepared with instructions for the task.
1. The group does not divide into

smaller groups but has a collective
brainstorm of ideas about each variable for the topic in question. A scribe
writes contributions for each SWOT
variable. A SWOT can also be made
for alternatives that are identified when
prioritising solutions.
To analyse and evaluate the internal and external environment of a given

situation. The whole situation is determined by the way it is internally developed
and by the context in which it happens (real situation and economic, political,
institutional, physical and technological tendencies). The analysis of Strengths
or powers, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats allows analysis of the status
quo and the potential of the case in question. It is very useful for strategic
planning exercises and can make employees of the same organisation more
aware of an action plan. It facilitates decision-making by allowing individuals
to achieve their objectives. It helps in the design of activities that might strengthen
positive aspects and reduce limiting ones.
How is it used ?
1. Explain the reasons behind SWOT analysis. Participants split into groups
of between 3 and 5 people to analyse one or all aspects.
2. The following are aspects of analysis of a situation or organisation.
Strengths:
Weaknesses:
Internal or inherent
positive aspects of the
case being analysed
that can be used
advantageously to
achieve objectives.
Negative aspects of the

internal or inherent
working of the case being
analysed that limit the
effective operation and
that may need to be
overcome in order to reach
the objectives.
Threats:
External Negative
aspects
which
represent an obstacle
in achieving your
objectives
and
therefore make it
difficult to fulfil
proposed goal.
3. Groups write their analysis on cards (one colour for each point), which
are grouped together and prioritised under each of the aspects of analysis.
4. The results from the groups are brought together: each groups display
boards are presented and the facilitator allows them to give explanations.
5. There is a discussion about the activities and tasks to strengthen the
consequences of them; planning of selected actions.
Aspects of analysis:
Internal environment
(we have under control)
External environment
(we have no control over)
Positives
Strengths
Oportunities
Negatives
Weaknesses
Threats
Clearly specify the goal and range of

the exercise. Results depend on who
is making the analysis, so we
recommend that groups be chosen
carefully.
Opportunities:
Positive aspects that
are
externally
demonstrated and
that help or favour
the fulfilment of the
objectives and can
therefore be used to
this end
151 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 - 25
Between
1 and 2 hours
Display boards, paper, flipchart, pens, circular card of different sizes and colours.
To analyse and understand the

interactions, links and
relationships
generated
between variables, organisations
or people. Analysis can help to
define responsibilities, areas of
conflict and motives for
disagreement.
When is it used ?

when you want to demonstrate
contrasts or relationships
between themes, roles,
responsibilities and links
between different characters.
How is it used ?
1. Present the exercise and establish the rules of
the game for contributions.
2. Start a brainstorming session about
organisations and/or people considered for the
exercise.
exercise; place these circles on the display

according to what has been established through
participants thoughts, reasonably close to the central organisation and according to the type of
activity being developed.
3. The main organisation is written on a large circle

of paper and placed in the middle of the display.
5. Use arrows to represent the type of relationship

and functions and responsibilities each has. You
can also add comments (as shown in the example)
4. On the smaller circles, write the names of

organisations and people considered for the
6. If it was decided at the beginning to work in

groups, compare results.
Making an analysis Venn diagrams
152 / 204
Making an analysis Flow diagrams/charts
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
1 and 2 hours
5 - 25
When is it used ?
It shows the flow of events and

decisions relating to a process in
a schematic way. It can illustrate
the complexity of a process or
serve as a basis for discussion and
reflection about a specific point
or moment within that process.

when it is necessary to analyse
in a schematic way the impact
of a process or show links and
relationships involved in it.
How is it used ?
Flipchart, pens and cards.
1. Explain the objective of the

exercise.
2. Present the theme.
3. Explain the rules of the game
for contributions and the criteria
for building the diagram, whether
it be as a whole workshop exercise
or in smaller groups; if the latter is
the case, organise the groups.
4. Indicate the start of the process
on the diagram. This can be agreed
with the participants.
5. Write up the first phase or step
and continue with the following
steps and respective links.
1. The diagram can be produced

beforehand and analysed with the group.
2. More detail can be included on the
diagrams to reinforce the analysis of it.
3. Groups can be split by gender so
that analysis gives the different
perceptions of men and women.
Exchange with
neighbours
Encourage participants to think about

the links and flows. In this case, they
analyse the possible consequences of
each action and put them in a flow chart,
taking into account both the positive and
negative aspects.
Customs
Export
6. Ramifications and aspects

continue to be added. At this
point you can include on each
step or level of the process, the
analysis of the different aspects
relating to it. For example,
costs, participation by gender,
dangers, percentage of benefit,
etc.
7. If working in groups, bring
all the diagrams together and
in full session create a single
diagram and further analyse
and synthesise the data.
Potato
Producer
Personal
consumption
Sell to
intermediary
Industry
Transporter
Wholesaler
Packaging
supplier
Restaurant
Supermarket
Local shop
Consumer
Chef
153 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 - 25
Between
60 and 120
minutes
Display boards, flipchart, paper, pens

and cards.
1. Time lines can be created using

specific subjects with the aim of
understanding the changes that take
place during the course of time in a
detailed and specified way.
2. Associating it to each date of analysis
means you can add information about
events that have occurred in different
places. For example, at a local, national
or international level.
When is it used ?
To find out about the history of a

process or subject, the background
and influences that have arisen and
that can be considered in the
current position.
The time line is a list of events
relating to a specific theme,
recorded as and when participants
remember them.
When you want to find out

about the background of an
idea, theme or process and you
want to link important ideas
about a subject on a grid that
shows the passage of time.
How is it used ?
1. Once a theme has been established, a participant identifies an event
from as long ago as they can remember and about which they have
information.
2. Either in smaller groups or with the whole group and starting from
this date, begin to record events that have happened since; follow
agreed time interval: each year, every two years, every three years, etc.
3. There will be references made to important national and international
events on some dates.
4. All events are written next to each date or time line and should
promote discussion.
5. When the task of writing down ideas about the time analysed is
finished, participants discuss the resulting trends. For example, the rise
and fall of some or other aspect or the frequency of a certain
circumstance, etc.
6. If it was initially decided that participants should work in groups,
they present their findings to the whole group and build a common
time line.
Time
line
Date
Event
Comments
This analysis can be combined with

others that focus on different aspects
to achieve a deeper understanding of
a problem, process or theme.
The time limit for this exercise is
subject to how deeply you want a
theme to be analysed.
Variation
Date
Event
Local
National
Making an analysis The time line
154 / 204
Making an analysis For and against
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 - 25
Between
30 and 45
minutes
Display boards, flipchart, paper, pens

and cards.
1. The group can be divided into two

smaller groups instead of asking for
two volunteers. Set a time limit for the
two groups to internally develop their
arguments for and against which they
then present to the whole workshop
and then develop a joint argument.
When is it used ?
To encourage open thought on a

theme when there is conflict of
opinion or to carry out an in-depth
analysis of the advantages and
disadvantages of an option or
theme.
When you see the need to clarify

contrasting opinions about a
subject or when you need
participants to express
themselves clearly.
How is it used ?
1. Identify the theme that needs to be clarified and formulate a specific
proposal or positive statement.
2. Ask for two volunteers to each take on a role: the optimist (who
defends the arguments for the proposal and highlights its favourable
aspects) and the pessimist (who puts across the arguments against the
proposal and points out the difficulties it presents).
3. When all ideas have been expressed they should be written up on a
comparative grid and after the arguments for and against have been
made, they should be prioritised.
Proposal
Arguments
for
It is important to visualise both the

process and conclusions.
Arguments
against
155 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
1 and 3 hours
5 - 25
depending on the
complexity of the
problem
Cards, marker pens, display board, sheets

of paper
When is it used ?
To show a problem from its causes

through to its consequences and
understand which aspects of the
problem should be tackled to
achieve significant change.
When a complex problem whose

causes and consequences lead to
confusion, needs to be analysed.
When aspects of a problem are
unclear and it is appropriate to
intervene.
How is it used ?
1. Clearly formulate the problem or problems you want to analyse and
write them on cards.
1. The result can be used to identify the

objectives of a project. From a central
problem, the general objective can be
derived; from the causes of a problem the
formulation of specific objectives can be
derived; from negative consequences,
results, success and impact can be derived.
The trainer should ensure that at least

some of the participants have a deeper
knowledge of the case or problem they
are analysing. To achieve better results you
can make a presentation to all participants
about the situation they are analysing:
background, people involved, socioeconomic context, conflicts, etc.
2. A central problem is identified and placed in the middle of the tree

3. Participants are encouraged to identify the causes of the central problem,
or from which it stems. These causes are written on cards and the cards
are placed on the roots of the tree.
4. Once the causes or roots of the problem have been established, the
negative effects of the central problem are identified and organised. Their
corresponding cards are placed on the branches of the tree.
5. When the task has been completed, the drawing is analysed and a
discussion is encouraged to establish whether the organisation of the
cards corresponds effectively to the causes and consequences.
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
It is important to consider negative causes and effects as this allows the result of
the exercise to be used to formulate
objectives, results, success and impact
they can be used in the formulation
process of a project.
Effect
Effect
Central problem
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Cause
Making an analysis The tree for analysing problems
156 / 204
Para analizar The discussion analysis table
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
5 - 25
1-2 hours
Display board, flipchart, paper, pens and

cards. Pre-produced tables.
When is it used ?
To find out about and

analyse the different areas
of conflict that occur
around the various themes
that deal with the same
subject.
This analysis tool is useful

when you see the need to
start a discussion about
themes that affect the
interests of the group.
How is it used ?
1. You can create this table with the aim of using

it to add depth to the results of other exercises
(the problem tree, table for prioritising problems,
etc.), in the following way: problems you wish to
analyse are written in the columns (vertical); the
elements or criteria underlying these problems
(ecological, economic, social, technological,
sociological, etc.), are written in the top row (horizontal). Where a problem meets one of the
criteria, rate the relationship with a number, using
different approaches: frequency, importance,
incidence, permanence, etc. For example:
1. The trainer presents a theme and creates an analysis table

template.
3 = high level of importance

2 = medium level of importance
2. Parameters are set for those who want to analyse the

discussion and for those involved in it, and are placed on the
analysis table.
3. Where the parameters for analysis and the person involved
cross, each participant should indicate the level of importance
of the relationship. They can indicate the level of knowledge,
level of incidence or identify key points in the relationship.
4. You can obtain a characterisation of the discussion with this
procedure that can be shown to the participants to analyse.
From this point, any implications or possible problems can be
discussed. Formulating questions makes analysis easier.
1 = minimum level of importance.

General results are analysed by all participants
working together.
Example of a table for the conflict analysis

Protagonists
Parameter
for analysis
You should use this tool preferably

when the members of the group know
each other quite well.
The facilitator must insist that
participants do not personalise conflict.
Land
ownership
Natural
resources
management
Decisions
about projects
Educational
aspects
Between
members of a
community
Between a
Between a
number of community and
communities
the state
With
landowners
or business
people
157 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
2 hours
5 25
Display boards, flipchart, paper, cards and

sheets of paper with templates of tables.
When is it used ?
To make decisions about

what is the most important
problem, theme or priority
to tackle, through the use
of a diagram in which the
main problems identified by
the group are related.
When you want to decide what

theme (situation or topic) to work
on, recognising the existence of
others.
How is it used ?
1. The objective and procedure for the exercise are explained.
2. They are distributed to the group working in teams and in accordance with pre-defined criteria that is set
with the final aim of the workshop in mind.
3. A table is prepared with rows and columns with the same number of boxes horizontally as vertically, for as
many problems as are being considered: in this example we have four problems, four boxes.
4. The identified problems are written in the same order in the rows and columns: Problem 1, Problem 2,
Problem 3 and Problem 4 (see the example).
5. Participants are asked to compare all the problems in pairs (1 and 2, 1 and 3, 1 and 4; 2 and 3, 2 and 4; 3
and 4) and define which of the two is more important or which should be most quickly resolved. Give enough
space for discussion and try to find a general consensus to indicate which one out of the two is more
important, with the corresponding number, where the boxes meet (see the example). At the end of the
exercise, half of the table will be full, as shown below.
6. Tables for all the groups should be compared and the problem that crops up the most chosen, taking into
account all the boxes in the table.
7. The most frequent problem is tackled with the exercises that follow. For example, with the Problem tree.
Column
Row
Problem 1
Problem 2
Problem 3
Problem 4
Problem 1
Problem 2
Problem 3
Problem 4
4
4
Planning The table for prioritising problems
158 / 204
Planning The declaration of commitment
How
many
people ?
5 - 25
How long does

it take ?
Individual work:
15 minutes
Presentation
by each participant:
2 minutes
A prepared display board explaining

how the exercise will be carried out,
a sheet of paper for each participant
or group and pens.
1. The number and type of questions

help collate the commitments made
by the participants and are determined
by the needs of the workshop. This
tool can work with small groups
instead of individually, especially if
you wish to group people together
who have something in common, for
example: they work for the same
institution or on the same project or
they are from the same place, etc.
Each oath is written down and

attached to the display board.
If you think that the photographic
record is going to take too long, we
recommend that these declarations
are sent to each participant to serve
as a reference in future activities
focussed on the fulfilment of
commitments.
When is it used ?
To record on a single document

(the declaration of commitment)
any personal commitments relating
to the application of what has been
learned in the workshop.
It is created during the workshop

but acquires deeper meaning
fulfilling a commitment that has
been made publicly when
participants return to their place of
origin and take on the
responsibility of putting these
commitments into action.
To facilitate and support the followup to the training process.
How is it used ?
1. The trainer gives his or her thoughts on the commitments that could
have taken place during the training, in relation to putting into practice
learning generated by the workshop. One of the most practical ways of
making these commitments more specific is by establishing categories
and questions related to them; for example:
Activities, what am I going to do?
Objectives, why?
Procedure, how am I going to do it?
Estimated time, when am I going to do it?
Alliances, who am I going to do it with?
Place, where am I going to do it?
Resources, what am I going to do it with?
Beneficiaries, who am I going to do it for?
Other categories and questions related that are considered relevant.
2. Each participant is given a sheet of paper with an outline of the identified
components; using this information, they write their Declaration.
3. Witnesses are identified among the participants.
4. The Declarations are presented and read out in front of all those taking
part.
5. The declaration is signed and dated in public and in the presence of
the respective witnesses.
(Name and date of the workshop)
Name:
Commitment Declaration Number
Witnesses
Name & signature
I (name of participant) commitment to:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name & signature
Name & signature
159 / 204
How
many
people ?
5 - 25
How long does

it take ?
Preparation:
10 minutes
Each presentation:
2 minutes
A display board explaining how the

exercise will be carried out, a sheet
of paper for each participant or group
and pens.
1. Work can be done in small groups

instead of individually, especially if
you wish to group together people
who have something in common. For
example, they work for the same
organisation, they are from the same
place, they are present in the same
region, etc.
When is it used ?
It facilitates the continuation of the

training process. On an individually
created table, it allows the
organisation of commitments that
each participant has made to apply
what has been learned in the
workshop.
It is created during the workshop

but has greater meaning to fulfil
commitments when participants
return to their place of origin and
put it into practice.
How is it used ?
1. The trainer reflects on the commitments that the training could have
provided, in relation to putting into practice learning generated by the
workshop. One of the most practical ways of making these commitments
more specific is by establishing categories and questions related to them;
for example:
Objectives, why?
Other categories and questions related that are considered relevant
2. Each participant is given a sheet of paper with an outline of the table,
or a blank sheet for each person to draw a table and write their name on
it.
3. Tables are presented and read to all those taking part in the workshop.
Each table is filled out and left as part of the photographic record.
The number and type of questions

formulated to gather the participants
commitments are determined by the
needs of the workshop.
If you think the photographic record
will take too long, we recommend
that you send the transcription to
each participant as a reference for
fulfilling their commitments.
(Name of the workshop) Commitment Table

Person responsible (name):
What
Why
How
When
Where
With whom
For whom
What do I need
Planning The table for prioritising problems
160 / 204
Planning The commitment star
How
many
people ?
5 - 25
How long does

it take ?
Individual work:
15 minutes
Each presentation:
2 minutes
A display board explaining how the

exercise will be done, a sheet of paper
for each participant or group and pens.
1. Work can be done in small groups

instead of individually, especially if you
wish to group together people who
have something in common. For
example, they work for the same
organisation, they are from the same
place, they are present in the same
region, etc.
When is it used ?
To facilitate the follow-up of the

training process. It allows each
participant to organise their
commitments to apply what has
been learned in the workshop. It
embraces the idea of reaching for a
star.
It is created during the

workshop but has a deeper
meaning (fulfilling a publicly
declared commitment) when
participants return to their
places of origin and put into
practice what they have agreed.
How is it used ?
1. The trainer reflects on the commitments that training could have
provided, in relation to putting into practice learning generated by the
workshop. One of the most practical ways of making these commitments
more specific is by establishing categories and questions related to them;
for example:
Objectives, why?
Other categories and questions related that are considered relevant
2. Each participant is given a piece of paper with the outline of a star, or
a blank piece of paper for each person to draw one; commitments are
recorded on the paper and their name is added.
3. Each participant presents and reads out their star. Each star is
transcribed and left to form part of the photographic record.
The number and type of questions

formulated to gather the participants
commitments are determined by the
needs of the workshop.
What am I going to do?

What else?
Replica workshops to
guarantee the
achievement of
planned intentions.
Continue working to strengthen

our small organisation.
Why?
To share the dream of a better
standard of living with
my communities.
With what?
If you think that the photographic record will take too long, we recommend
that you send transcriptions to each
participant as a reference to fulfil their
commitments.
For whom?
My own resources and

those that others are
prepared to contribute.
The small organisations.
name
How?
Working with my community,
NGOs and local state
organisations in a systematic
way, directed towards
creating together a
common plan.
Where?
Three towns and the
neighbouring areas.
With whom?
The community, NGOs
and state institutions.
When?
It is an ongoing
process.
161 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
From 3 hours
to 1 day
5 25
When is it used ?
To order objectives and

results in a logical way. It is
useful in the process of
formulating projects.
When you need to order ideas

relating to a work plan, after getting
to know the main situation that
needs improving or changing. It is
ideal to use this tool after an analysis.
Flipchart, sheets of paper, cards and marker

pens.
How is it used ?
The starting point is to use previously identified and formulated objectives (the general objective as well as
specific ones). A number of specific objectives lead to a general objective. It is considered that a specific
objective has been fulfilled or achieved when corresponding products or results are obtained. For these to be
achieved, various activities need to be carried out that. The creation of the following table facilitates the
organisation of the described logical sequence.
General objective
Specific Objectives
1.
Results
Activities
1.1.
1.2.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
1. A general objective is formulated and corresponds to the

solution identified from the central problem or the main situation.
2. Specific objectives are defined. These can correspond to the
main causes of the central problem. We recommend that you
formulate objectives that can be measured or verified in an
appropriate, realistic time frame.
3. The results of what is hoped to be achieved for each specific
objective are noted down.
4. Activities or actions deemed necessary to obtain results are
defined.
Various results can be obtained for each specific objective and to
achieve each result, it may be necessary to miss out various
activities. What is vital is that goal is coherent and that each level
ensures the achievement of a higher level as shown in the diagram.
There is impact
If we achieve the general objective
We achieve the general objective
If we achieve the specific objectives
We achieve specific objectives
If we achieve results
We achieve results
If we carry activities out well
Planning The objectives table
162 / 204
Planning The action plan
How
many
people ?
5-25
How long does

it take ?
From:
3 hours
up to
1 day
Paper, pens, display boards, cards and

sheets containing the table.
1. Groups can be divided according

to the number of objectives so that each
group works on one objective. Later,
when all participants are together, the
rest can contribute. You can include
an additional column of other
necessary materials or components.
When is it used ?
It designs an ordered sequence of

activities; it can complement the
table of objectives. It helps to chart
decision-making and summarise
actions, responsibilities and the schedule.
When you want to formulate

actions for a specific goal in a
schematic way, to encourage
collective work and to serve as
a basic reference for the followup and evaluation.
How is it used ?
1. The trainer presents the exercise and agrees the
methodology and format of the table with the group.
2. Subgroups are formed in accordance with previous criteria.
For example, the type of organisation participants belong to,
by objective, etc.
3. The table is developed explaining each of the proposed
aspects. For example:
Objective
Activities
Sub-activities
Person
responsible
Aim for maximum participation and

ensure clarity and comprehension.
4. Once the table has been completed, it is reviewed
5. Results are presented by the sub groups to the whole
workshop and the different approaches are discussed with
the aim of adding to the information and obtaining a more
complete table.
Schedule
1 2 3 4 5 6
163 / 204
How
many
people ?
23
each day
How long does

it take ?
Daily preparation: 30 minutes

Daily presentation: 15 minutes
Paper, pens, a space available outside of the

workshop schedule, medals, badges or other
means to identify members of the committee.
When is it used ?
To make a continuous
evaluation; it promotes
reflection on the previous day
of the workshop. It serves as
feedback for the following days
of the workshop to give
participants an idea about the
learning process in advance.
Throughout the whole workshop,

at the beginning of each day.
How is it used ?
1. The reason why the evaluation is being made and the advantages of it are explained.
2. The committee is made up of three participants, volunteers or individuals chosen by the trainer. This group
changes each day of the workshop.
3. The committee summarises what happened the day before in terms of: themes, content, methodology,
participation, etc. It can be done in a humorous way highlighting small but significant events or anecdotes:
the phrase of the day, character of the day, news item of the day, etc.
4. When the first day is over and before starting the second, the committee meets to prepare its presentation.
We recommend that someone from the training team supports the first committee with this task to get the most
out of this tool. This committee will serve as an example to the following ones.
5. The following day, the committee presents its evaluation of the previous day and, then hands over its work
to the committee that will succeed it for the day that is just starting.
6. The trainer thanks the committee for the support they have given to the group and incorporates any
suggested changes.
The daily commitee
What is it like?
What does it do?
Made up of 3 or 4 participants
Changes daily
Summarises the previous day

and makes a visual presentation
Gives feedback about:
The thematic content
Medthodological procedures
Other issues
Starts the day with a fun activity
Reviews the post box
Appoints the next committee
Evaluations The daily committee
164 / 204
Evaluations The moodometer
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Evaluation (each day):
5 minutes
When is it used ?
It measures (monitors) mood

levels within the group throughout
the workshop.
At the end of each working day,

as a means of continuous
evaluation, but it allows a graph
to be created illustrating how
participants felt during the events
of the day.
Average calculation
(each day):
7 minutes
7 - 35
Paper to draw the table on. A sticker

for each participant, each day.
1. An impromptu evaluation can be made

using the same method at difficult points
in the workshop, with cartoon faces on
just one line.
2. Mood levels in smaller groups can be
measured within the group, for example,
one colour sticker for women and
another colour for the men. At the final
count, it is possible to see the different
mood levels by gender, which could be
used by the training team to make
decisions to balance up the content of
the workshop to improve the mood of
one of the genders.
How is it used ?
1. A table is prepared with cartoon faces, as indicated in the picture
(below)
2. The reasons for the evaluation and the way it will be carried out
are explained.
3. When the working day has finished each participant is asked to
put a sticker in a box next to the corresponding cartoon face to
represent their mood during the day. This is done before participants
leave the room.
4. The Daily Committee is invited to consider the result of this
evaluation when they make their presentation.
5. In the final evaluation, the stickers are counted on the table.
Then the average number of stickers is marked out and a large dot
drawn in the row for the corresponding cartoon face. Finally, all the
large dots are joined up, with a pen. The resulting curve reflects the
evolution of the groups humour and mood throughout the
workshop.
Presenting this tool the first day for the first time takes 10 minutes.
Each time participants add their stickers onto the table (once a day,
at the end of the day), 5 minutes. We calculate the daily average to
be around 7 minutes. Added to this, the group needs a few minutes
to think about the previous days results; for example, when the
Daily Committee makes their presentation or in the evaluation at
the end of the workshop.
If you dont have any stickers

available, you can use pens and
make crosses or large dots.
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
165 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
8 - 40
45 and
60 minutes
Paper, stickers (1 sticker multiplied by

the number of participants and subjects
that needed to be clarified), cards and
pens. A list of subjects to be evaluated.
1. It can be combined with sheets of

paper or display boards to add any
comments or to note down my
suggestions for future workshops,
etc.
2. You can use different coloured
stickers for men and women to make
a different evaluation.
3. If you do not have any stickers, the
dots can be made with marker pens.
When is it used ?
To anonymously evaluate
different aspects of the workshop
in depth and to exhibit the
evaluation on a chart.
During the final phase of

evaluation in the workshop.
How is it used ?
1. Explain why this evaluation is being carried out.
2. Show the evaluation charts prepared for the subject, explaining
each aspect of it and how stickers should be applied.
3. Participants put one sticker per subject in the corresponding space
very satisfied, satisfied, slightly unsatisfied, very unsatisfied .At this
point, the training team leave the room and move away from the
displays or tables to guarantee an anonymous vote and avoid
influencing any decisions.
4. The stickers in each box are added and each total is written next to
the corresponding stickers and box.
5. The results of the evaluation are released and each section is
analysed.
6. Participants are thanked for their contribution to the evaluation
and the trainer explains how the results of it will be considered and
utilised in future.
Try to offer more than 3 areas to assess

and always an even number (approval/
disapproval) to avoid indecisive people
sitting on the fence in the evaluation
process.
Very
satisfied
Content
Method
Organisation
Satisfied
Slightly
unsatisfied
Very
unsatisfied
Evaluations The evaluation chart
166 / 204
Evaluations The lightening poll
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 - 25
When is it used ?
To gather opinions about how

the session is progressing and
to facilitate open reflection from
the group.
At the end of a session or at the

end of the workshop.
10 - 15
minutes
How is it used ?
Display board, cards, pens.
1. When the facilitator feels it is most convenient, they asks

the group to reflect upon what has been developed in the
session (or day) that is just about to end.
1. Participants can be asked to express

their opinions through associations, or
rather, with words that represent enjoyable
and unpleasant feelings. For example:
Sweet (I enjoyed it)
Bitter (I didnt enjoy it)
Honey (I enjoyed it)
Verbena (I didnt enjoy it)
These opinions can be written down on
cards and quantified for use in the
conclusion.
The trainer should clearly explain that he

or she is assessing the session and ask
participants to concentrate on what
happened in it.
2. After five minutes, participants are asked to comment on

their thoughts in one short phrase or if possible, one word.
3. Once each participant has given an opinion in an orderly
manner, the facilitator can consider what has been said to plan
the next session or day of the workshop.
167 / 204
How
many
people ?
8 - 30
How long does

it take ?
Depending on
how many subjects
are to be evaluated,
Between
15 and
30 minutes
Paper, pens or stickers (1 sticker per

participant multiplied by the number
of participants and by the number of
aspects you want to evaluate).
1. Combining it with sheets of paper

or a display board to record any
comments, or to write my message
for future workshops.
2. Vary the evaluation by gender (for
example, women have blue stickers
and men have black stickers).
When is it used ?
To evaluate a number of aspects

of the workshop in a quick and
simultaneous way; it has the
advantage of showing the values
used by the group to rate each
aspect.
When you need to evaluate a

session or indeed, the workshop
as a whole.
How is it used ?
1. Choose aspects of the workshop you wish to evaluate; for example,
methodology, group work, themes covered, etc.
2. A wheel is drawn and the aspects that are to be evaluated are
added to it. The trainer should present this tool, briefly explaining
each aspect, how it is evaluated and if it is to be evaluated in a varied
way.
3. Participants are asked to evaluate each of the aspects drawn up, or
rather, add a sticker: one for each participant on each aspect, in its
corresponding space. It is better for the training team to give enough
freedom and privacy for participants to make their evaluations in peace.
4. The stickers or marks are added up for each aspect and in each
space.
5. The results of the evaluation are given out.
6. Participants are thanked for their contributions and trainer explains
how the results of it will be considered and utilised in future.
ality
spit
ns
tatio
c
e
Exp
Productiv
i t y le
v
e
l of
th
Themes / Topics
up
gro
Try to offer more than 3 areas to assess

and always an even number (approval/
disapproval) to avoid indecisive people
sitting on the fence in the evaluation
process.
Ho
Meth
odo
log
y
3. If you do not have any stickers to

hand, use marker pens to enter
information on the wheel.
Evaluations The evaluation wheel
168 / 204
Playing games and encouraging creativity Crazy canasta
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 18
Between
15 and 20 minutes
Enough seats for all participants and space to

set them out in a circle.
When is it used ?
For participants to learn

the names of the other
people taking part in the
workshop; to have fun. It
is also a useful ice
breaker.
At different times during the first

day of the workshop. If it is a large
group, it is better to do it during
the afternoon of the first day, at
the end of the first day or the
beginning of the next, when faces
and names are more familiar; if it
is a small group, immediately after
the first presentation.
How is it used ?
1. Participants sit in a circle so there are no seats left empty.
2. The trainer stands in the middle of the circle and explains the rules of the game.
3. The game is started: one person situated in the middle of the circle signals to another sitting down and says lemon,
lemon; this person then has to say the name of the person sitting to their left. If the player in the middle changes and
says orange, orange, the person signalled to has to say the name of the person to their right. This continues until the
signalled person hesitates, takes too long to answer or says the wrong name; in this case, they have to go into the middle
and the person who was in the middle takes that persons place.
4. When the person in the middle says Crazy canasta, all participants quickly change seats; the person in the middle
can use this time to sit down leaving someone else without a seat who then has to go into the centre to continue the
game.
One possible variation of this game is when the trainer takes the place of the person in the middle of the circle and
indicates the movement of people with certain characteristics: for example, those who are wearing black shoes change
seats; or, all the men; or, all the women; all those wearing a white shirt; all those older than 25, all those who come from
the northWhen the trainer says crazy canasta all participants move. Those who make a mistake or who do not
change seats when they should, have to drop out of the game.
This game can be played outside, and weather (and participants) permitting, it can be played on the grass.
169 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
15 25
15 - 20 minutes
When is it used ?
It makes the group more

energetic at times of lethargy.
This tool also develops the
group dynamics.
When the group seems tired

or lethargic.
A clear space where the group can move about

comfortably.
How is it used ?
1. Everyone stands in a circle.
2. When the trainer signals, everybody closes their eyes, extends their arms and walks towards the middle of
the circle trying to reach other peoples hands. Then the trainer puts some peoples arms under other peoples
forming a human knot and trying to ensure that nobody lets go of anybody elses hand.
3. Each participant must be holding two other peoples hands before the group open their eyes. The next step
is for participants to try and disentangle the human knot which they created without a single hand being
released.
4. The game ends when the knot has been as untied as far as possible.
Playing games and encouraging creativity The (Gordian) knot
170 / 204
Playing games and encouraging creativity The wheel
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10 30
10 - 15 minutes
None just enough space.
How is it used ?
1. Participants form a wheel by placing their hands
around the waist of the person in front of them and
then begin to walk around in a circle.
2. Little by little, the group should make the circle
smaller (going in towards the centre)
3. When participants are tightly packed they are
encouraged to continue walking round in the circle
but should bend their knees until they are sitting
on the legs of the person behind.
When is it used ?
It develops trust and the

group dynamic.

when participants appear tired
or lethargic, this game puts
energy back into the group.
171 / 204
How many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
Between
There is no limit
15 and 25 minutes
When is it used ?
To arouse creative abilities in

the group participants use
both the left and right sides
of their brains.
At any point in the workshop.

It is useful for preparing
participants before using
another tool that requires
creativity and stimulates the
groups concentration at the
beginning of the day.
Different coloured pens, cards (circular) or sheets

of paper with the names of the different colours
and lollipop sticks to make signs.
How is it used ?
The main principle behind this exercise is that it stimulates
creativity amongst participants. The right hand side of the
brain tries to say the colour at the same time as the left
hand side of the brain says the word.
1. Participants are divided into groups at random, a set of
posters is given to each and the game is explained.
2. Each poster has the name of a colour written in another
colour; for example, the word red is written in blue, the
word green is written in red and so on. You can make
up as many posters as you wish. The more variation there
is on the posters, the more amusing the game will be.
Lollipop sticks and round card can be used to make the
signs or simply make small posters.
3. One person in each team is given the task of showing
the signs to the members of another group. Taking it in
turns, one member from each group says the colour that
the other team member is showing until all the participants
have had a turn: you should say the colour you see quickly
not the word that is written, but the colour it is written
in. For example, if the word red is written in green, you
should say green; if you read the actual word, you lose.
4. The points for each group are noted down on a board.
The group with the most points at the end of the game
wins.
Red
Blue
Green
Black
Yellow
Playing games and encouraging creativity Reading colours
172 / 204
Playing games and encouraging creativity Four flowers in one pencil stroke
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
15-20 minutes
or the time limit you
want to set
When is it used ?
It prepares participants for activities

directed towards gathering unusual
or unconventional ideas, because
it stimulates creativity. It also helps
members of the group to relax after
a long working day.
At any time during the workshop,

but especially when the group
needs to be prepared for providing
ingenious and creative solutions
to a problem. This is due to the
fact that participants have to use
both sides of their brain at the
same time.
There is
no limit
A sheet of paper (with the final drawing),

a pencil for each participant and
something to lean on.
1. Groups can be formed to make it a

team game.
2. The challenge can be set for
participants on the first day of the
workshop with the solution given on the
last day. If a number of participants
manage to solve the puzzle, a competition
can be created with a leader table for
those who manage to draw the flower
the quickest.
Those who already know how to solve

the puzzle should not take part. If there
are a number of people who can solve
it, the game should be changed so that
the winner is the first person to teach
another participant to draw the flower
without lifting the pencil from the paper.
How is it used ?
1. The puzzle is presented to all participants at the same time. It is
about finding the course of the line that allows you to draw four
flowers in one pencil stroke (without lifting or removing the pencil
from the paper).
2. Each participant or group is given a final drawing of the four flowers
that can be used as a reference and a time limit is set to complete the
task.
3. The participant that works out how to do it first has to complete to
picture on a display board in front of other participants.
173 / 204
How
many
people ?
There is
no limit
How long does

it take ?
10 minutes
A board that is visible from all parts of

the room, paper and pencils for all
participants.
1. Groups can be formed to make it a

team game.
2. If a number of participants find the
solutions, a competition can be created
with a leader board to show who can
draw it the quickest.
Those who already know how to solve

the puzzle should not take part. If there
are a number of people who can solve
it, the game should be changed so that
the winner is the first person to teach
another participant how to do it.
When is it used ?
It stimulates creativity and prepares

participants for activities directed
towards gathering unusual or
unconventional ideas. It is used to
obtain unusual responses because
this game makes participants use
both sides of their brain.
At any point during the workshop,

especially when the group needs
to be prepared for providing
ingenious and creative solutions to
a problem. It can also be used when
the group starts to tire or become
lethargic or after a heavy working
day, as it helps participants to relax.
How is it used ?
1. The puzzle is presented to all participants at the same time. It is
about finding the course of a line that passes through each of the dots
(on both pictures, or one of them) in one pencil stroke without
removing the pencil from the paper.
2. Each participant or group is given paper and a pencil and a time
limit is set to complete the task.
3. The participant that works out how to draw the line first has to
demonstrate it on a display board in front of the other participants.
Playing games and encouraging creativity Joining the dots
174 / 204
Playing games and encouraging creativity Lets get organised
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
20-25
When is it used ?
To find out more about the

participants before organising them
into working groups.
When the group is looking tired

or lethargic or when more
information is required about
participants to organise working
groups under specific criteria.
15-20 minutes
None. Although it is important to have a

clear space where participants can move
about and organise themselves according
to the rules of the game.
1. Instead of standing in line, groups can

be formed that take into account different
categories. For example, grouping people
by the type of organisation they are from:
people from NGOs or people from business; local and foreign people; ethnic
groups; through music or colour
preference. If the location and weather
permit, this exercise can be held outside.
How is it used ?
1. Participants are asked to stand up and move in different directions.
Explain that guidelines will be given for them to organise themselves
into a line or a queue. These guidelines can be:
Organising yourselves by age, from the youngest to the eldest.
Organising yourselves by height, from shortest to tallest.
Organising yourselves in alphabetical order using your first names.
Organising yourselves in alphabetical order using your surnames.
Organising yourselves by build, from the thinnest to the fattest.
Organising yourselves by place of origin, from the North to the
South.
Organising yourselves by the number of children you have.
2. After each guideline is issued, participants are given a certain time
to identify themselves with their immediate neighbours. Each new
organisation created allows participants to get to know one another
better.
3. To end the game, each participant can give their name, adding to it
a characteristic that starts with the same letter:
Guidelines are determined by the profile

Be careful when choosing the guidelines,
as some people or groups are sensitive
to certain aspects of their work and lives.
Elaine, the enthusiast

Theodore, the thinker
Monica, the magnificent
175 / 204
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
30-45
minutes
Marker pens or pencils that can be

made to look like scissors or actual
scissors if they are available.
10-25
How is it used ?
1. Participants sit in a circle and facing the
centre.
2. The person directing the game, sitting in
the same position as everybody else, takes
some scissors (or two pens or pencils placed
together to look like scissors) and passes them
to the person sitting to his/her right whilst
saying:
I give you these scissors open or I give you
these scissors closed
3. What is said when the scissors are handed
over open or closed is not related to
the way in which they are handed to the next
person, but to the position of the persons legs
at the moment of passing the scissors to their
neighbour. The person who receives them
should say: I receive these scissors open or
I receive these scissors closed according to
the position of their legs at the moment of
receiving them. He/she then passes them on
to the next person saying I give you these
scissors and the person receiving them
answers: I receive these scissors. The open
or closed scissors are passed to the right until
all participants have passed or received them.
Many will understand the game as the scissors
are passed from one person to the next.
Playing games and encouraging creativity The scissors game
176 / 204
Playing games and encouraging creativity The salad of proverbs
How
many
people ?
How long does

it take ?
10-25
Paper and pencils. Enough space

for participants to get into lines or
queues and move about freely.
20-30 minutes
How is it used ?
1. Participants get into two lines so that they are effectively
paired up. Members of each line identify their partner from
the other queue; once everybody recognises their partner
for this exercise, the queue on the right leaves the room.
2. Each person in the line on the left writes down the first
part of a saying or proverb, folds the paper and leaves the
room.
3. Participants from the line on the right enter into the room
and are asked to write down the second part of a saying or
proverb. When this has been completed, the queue from
the left re-enters the room and each participant stands in
front of their partner (identified from the other line in step
1).
4. In order, pairs read out what they wrote; the person
from the left queue reads out what he/she wrote as the
first part of the proverb and his/her partner reads out the
second part.
5. The result of reading these proverbs is very amusing as
the resulting random proverbs are unknown and sometimes
have no meaning.
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Problems

9.
Problems
9.1.
Introduction
are not. This is when there may be difficulties that
t is normal for all training workshops to encounter
should be recognised and managed by the training
situations that are critical to a lesser or greater extent.
team. They should be considered when creating
These situations can relate to the group, be
working groups with one common goal: learning.
interpersonal, logistical, organisational or financial.

We know that each workshop is a unique experience
Although as a general rule, good preparation and
and that there are no recipes for solving problems. In
planning guarantee a smooth and successful
this chapter we discuss the most common situations
implementation of the workshop, there will almost
and problems that may arise before, during and after
always be unexpected events. We have all probably
any workshop; these are listed below:
been in unplanned disagreeable situations, for example
also found ways of overcoming such problems.
Logistical and organisational problems

Interpersonal problems
Financial problems
The training workshop implies interaction between
For each situation we look at here, we propose
people with different points of view, experiences and
approaches and procedures that the training team
interests that may sometimes be diverse and at other
could adopt to prevent those problems and alternative
times may be similar when faced with the training
solutions if they do arise. So you will be able to think
objectives. The participants may be prepared to share
about these critical situations during the planning or
their knowledge and skills and to accept changes in
the organisation of the workshop and anticipate them
their understanding and practises, but sometimes they
by preparing a plan B alternative action.
a technical fault, a speaker who does not arrive, a bus

for an excursion that does not arrive, etc, but we have
177 / 204
178 / 204

9.2.
Problems before starting the workshop
9.2.1. Logistical
and organisational problems
Undesirable situation
How to prevent it
How to manage the situation
Difficulty drawing up the programme

in conjunction with the organising
institutions.
If one of the organising institutions takes
a marginal interest in the workshop
preparation, decision making can be slow,
the timetable may be put back and it
can reduce the amount of time available
for organisation.
Establish a direct contact: prepare a

meeting in advance with the principal
people in each organisation to present
all the information relating to the
workshop; or ensure that they receive
this information by some other means. It
is important that everyone involved
knows the workshop theme, understands
the importance of preparation and decides and commits their support.
Create the programme with the

information available: once the deadlines
have arrived, create another amended
plan.
Circulate an action list to all the

participating organisations, including the
names of those responsible and the
deadlines for each action point. Putting
the undertakings into the open may
increase motivation and the likelihood of
the tasks being completed.
Keep in regular contact with those
responsible to exchange information.They
then feel included and committed and will
be up to date with progress and any
possible modifications in the programme.
The ideal people for each role and to
carry out respective functions in the
training cannot be found.
The preparation process gets behind
despite the objectives and general
framework of the workshop being clear;
the materials, the tools and the logistics
need to be amended to suit the profiles
and experience of the trainers.
Look for information: consult people

who are connected with the theme and
review notes from similar events; search
the internet; look in bibliographies and
directories, checking their capabilities and
skills. If you identify anyone who is not
well known enough, request a curriculum
vitae and references.
Make contact in advance: invite the
selected people well in advance, provide
them with the relevant information and
confirm their par ticipation in the
workshop as soon as possible.
Motivation: let people know about
information that may be of interest to
them; for example, the list of participants,
organisations involved, other members of
the team and remuneration if this applies.
Obtain relevant information about the

organisation and include it in the
workshop documents; when the
organisations know about this material,
it may become motivated and interested
in the workshop and decide to put some
energy into it.
Suggest to the organisations that if they
do not have people available who can
be assigned to the workshop preparation,
the completion of the action points
should be delegated to the coordinator,
who should agree to keep them
informed of progress.
Amend the program: Establish whether

the theme or part of it can be changed,
without any detrimental effect on the
learning objective.
Delegate tasks: make arrangements with
another member of the training team
who is able to take on these
responsibilities.
Change the dates of the workshop if it
is still possible.

How to prevent it
A lot of preparation for the workshop

and very little time.
This is quite common and puts the
members of the training team in a difficult
situation making them work under
pressure.
Planning time: create an agenda with all

the tasks and deadlines and identify
possible alternatives. You will then know
exactly how long the organisation of the
workshop will take.
Prioritise: establish the most relevant

tasks and carry them out in order of
impor tance. (see: Conceptual
framework, Time management p 27)
Get ahead with tasks: carry out all the

tasks that you can without having to
depend on other people or organisations,
although you may still not have definitive
confirmation for all aspects of the
workshop. For example, prepare a draft
invitation which later you will only have
to add the date and place; compile a list
of possible participants and their contact
details; visit and request quotes and
available dates from the venues where
the training could take place.
Delegate tasks: consider your own
resources and skills, those of other
members of the team and of the
participating organisations when assigning
responsibilities and with dates (see: Conceptual framework, time management, p
27).Various tasks can then be carried out
simultaneously and you save time.
The training team does not manage to
meet.
If the training team does not meet before
the workshop, the understanding of each
persons responsibilities may not be clear
far enough in advance and therefore
confusion may arise regarding roles
during the workshop. For the same
reasons, preparation will not be complete.
Assign resources in the planning stage

so that these meetings take place; tell the
members of the team about the meetings
far enough in advance and, to encourage
them to attend, agree the agenda items
that will be covered in each meeting.
Agree with the team: While you are
appointing the team, keep in mind
peoples availability geographic location
or intention to re-locate for attending
the workshop planning and organisational
meetings.
Look for synergy: to save transport costs
and time, team meetings could coincide
with other events of common interest.
More requests for places than there are

places available.
The workshop preparation is affected,
as is the budget. Adjustments should be
made for the whole implementation
stage is there enough room at the inn?
Get support: look for and confirm the

help you need to prepare the workshop
in the time available: two pairs of hands
do more than one and two pairs of eyes
see more than one; and... be sure to
take deep breaths and relax. (see: Conceptual base, Time management, p 27)
Decide on how appropriate it is to carry out the workshop: realistically and
objectively decide whether with the
resources and time available it is still
possible to carry out the workshop and
meet the objectives. If you decide that it
is not now possible, then you can
postpone or cancel it.
Use alternative communication

methods: keep in regular contact using
the communication methods available
and so make sure the members of the
team know the workshop objectives so
that they can contribute information for
the programme.
Timetable at least one meeting: the
meeting that the team has the day before
the workshop is essential; make the most
of this meeting to discuss priorities, assign
and agree the tasks and commitments
that each person in the team will be
responsible for during the workshop.
Carry out a needs analysis to identify

the level of interest that the workshop
has created before making it public.
Check the participants profiles: ensure

that those interested meet the defined
criteria required for the workshop.
Emphasise the participant profile and the

organisation profile.
Limit the number of participants: be kind
179 / 204
180 / 204

How to prevent it
Limit the number of delegates from each

of the invited organisations.
but clear when advising applicants that

they are not able to attend and explain
the difficulties that would arise if there
was a larger group.
Explain clearly the criteria for how the

decision of maximum numbers was
arrived at.
Participants do not confirm.

When participants do not confirm a
sense of uncertainty develops during the
preparation of the workshop and can
be a de-motivating force for those doing
the inviting.
Make the invitations in the right way:

send out the invitation far enough in
advance to allow the participants to fit it
into their diaries.
Insist on confirmation: when the deadline

arrives, contact the potential participant
and determine whether they will provide
a definitive confirmation or not.
Make confirmation easy: with the

invitation, enclose a form that the
potential participants can use to confirm
attendance by a certain date and mention
here that numbers are limited. (See:
Organising a training workshop, Example
of an invitation, p 60.)
Use the reserve list: call the participants

on the reserve list, invite them and get
confirmation of their attendance.
Keep in contact: Check that the invitation

has been received and identify the person
to contact so you can continue sending
that person information about the
workshop and obtain their commitment.
Keep a reserve list: make a note of
people who are interested in the
workshop who can be considered should
others not show an interest in the
invitation.
The profile of the people interested in

the workshop does not conform to the
ideal profile.
The programme will need to be
amended, because it may be that the
conceptual and methodological level
prepared for the ideal group is not
suitable for the new group. The training
could lose its objectivity.
Repeat the workshop: consider the

possibility of having two events instead
of having large groups.
Be clear in the objectives and content

of the workshop what the participant
profile is and convey this clearly from the
first invitation.
Suggest criteria to help make the right
choice.This should also be included in the
first invitation.
Research the organisations you plan to
invite and who to send the invitation to,
prior to sending it.
Send the agenda. Knowing what the agenda includes may help to improve the
selection criteria of the candidate.
Take the decision: establish a deadline

for deciding whether running the
workshop is justified with the number
of participants that have so far confirmed
for this date. Balance the advantages
against the disadvantages of postponing
the workshop or running it with a small
number of participants. Whatever
decision you take, it should be taken with
the training objectives in mind.
Reduce the duration of the workshop
if the definitive decision is to run it. This
way, you can save some resources for
future events or even include additional
activities that will build on the learning
experience.
Ask the organisations that have been
invited to reconsider their choice of
participant and propose someone who
more closely meets the training
objectives.
Re-send the agenda, making sure that it
clearly includes the subject content.
Keep in contact with the organisations
that have been invited.
Suggest the name of the participant that
should attend, if you know the
organisation and its members well.

How to prevent it
Avoid detracting from the workshop

with other events that may interest the
ideal group.
Consider adapting the workshop to

meet the needs of the participants who
actually confirm.
Look for a balance between the workshop

content, the venue and the profile of the
participants and make this known.
The group of interested participants
does not fit the preferred diversity.
The programming takes longer because
of adjustments that need to be made.
The objectives should be modified
because they had been set with the
diversity of participants in mind. The
themes and methodology should also
be reconsidered.
Outline in the invitation the benefits of

having a group of participants with
different characteristics for the positive
development of the workshop (see:
Organising a training workshop, The
invitation, p 42).
Assign enrolment quotas according to
certain criteria; for example, gender, age,
where people come from, type of
organisation, specialism, etc.
Ask the invited organisations to

reconsider their decision, pointing out
to them the characteristics participants
should have, so they can make the most
of the workshop objectives.
Try to complement the group with
other participants who have the
characteristics which are least
represented in the initial group.
Keep in mind other points raised in the

previous scenario.
A suitable workshop venue cannot be
found.
It is possible that some logistical matters
cannot be confirmed and they will have
to be done at the last minute. In the
meantime, the programming progresses
with a certain degree of uncertainty
because the planning is based on
hypotheses.
Consult others: discuss the situation with

people you know who may have
alternative suggestions. Look in the
telephone directory.
Materials cannot be found.

The programming cannot be confirmed
and the participants will not know about
materials in advance, despite this being
one of the main requirements of the
training.
Research in advance by contacting other

people and organisations regarding where
to obtain the materials or what
alternatives are on the market.
Visit other venues: contact and arrange

visits to different places chosen using the
criteria and recommendations put
forward in the conception of the
workshop. (see: Organising a training
workshop, The venue, p 44)
Borrow items; for example, technical

equipment and display boards.
Draw up a plan B.
Put your own processes in order. This
way you will easily find the useful
information.
Create contextual plans. Before beginning
the preparation, be realistic about the
how? when considering the what, why,
where, when and for whom?
Adapt to the circumstances: identify all

the advantages the available venue has
to offer and minimise the problems.
Reserve the venue which meets the
most requirements for the workshop to
take place.
Procure any additional resources that
you can, such as fans, blankets, tables, etc.
Create or obtain alternative materials.

Be creative when working with the
available resources, making the most of
them and recycling materials from
previous events.
Discuss the problem with the training
team so that together you think of an
alternative.
Plan with what you have because
resources will not magically appear.
Use plan B.
181 / 204
182 / 204

9.2.2.
Interpersonal problems
How to prevent it
Disagreement among the team

Preparation is not participative.
Subjectivity prevails before objectivity and
this takes up more time than planned.
Choose people who are team players;

that means that there is an affinity
between the people who are
incorporated into the training team.
Define and assign the different roles and

responsibilities with clarity and make sure
that they have been understood.
Arrange meetings: having meetings

between the members of the team helps
foster the positive make-up of the group.
Identify a mediator who can help to reduce the tensions and conflicts that may
arise.This person should remain neutral
and look for objective solutions.
Identify possible conflicts: be aware of

conflicts underlying or explicit and
tr y to deal with them before they
become a problem.
Consult and analyse the possibility to

dispend with one of the members
should attempts to resolve a particular
conflict fail.
How to prevent it
One of the sponsors does not provide

the financial support promised.
Preparation takes more time, which
affects decision making over time.
Plan carefully: you should create a realistic

budget and investment plan and only take
loans to pay for the most essential
expenditure. Start with enough time to
look for and secure financial support.This
way you will have sufficient time to look
for other income sources if one of them
withdraws suppor t. Create realistic
budgets to enable accurate planning.
Reduce expenditure: consider the

possibility of eliminating costly activities,
for example, field trips. You can also
choose more economic catering
provision, for example, buying direct from
the suppliers instead of contracting those
in the venue restaurant. Be careful,
however, that you do not break contracts
you have already made.
Diversify the financial sources: from the

start, look for different sources of financial
support so you do not depend exclusively
on one source.
Agree additional contributions from the

participants: inform the organisations
that support the participants, what the
situation is and discuss with them the
possibility of them covering costs. They
may make suggestions on how to reduce costs.
9.2.3.
Financial problems
Early payment discounts may be lost.

Some contracts are lost because the
agreed deposits are not paid.
The suppliers get the wrong impression
of the coordinator who is the person
seen as responsible for the agreement.
Secure genuine commitment: the

existence of a contract raises the level of
commitment of those involved.
Make agreements with legal
representatives or with the person
responsible for expenditure in the
organisations.
Invite other similar organisations to take
part: contact and build support with
people or organisations connected to the
Arrange instalments for payments not

yet made.
Postpone the workshop: if you believe
the arrangements are not sufficient to
run the workshop according to plan, and
that you have considered all the
alternatives, consider postponing the
workshop until you have secured the

How to prevent it
workshop theme; The support of these

organisations could improve the level of
commitment you receive.
necessary funds. Although it may seem

embarrassing at the time, it is better to
postpone the workshop than carry it
through with differences that jeopardise
the objective of the workshop.
Ask for different quotations: have

different offers for cost and service
so you begin to adapt the actual
expenditure and resources.
Investigate the possibility of credit to
allow for the possible delay in receiving
funds from sponsors; explore in advance
the possibility of extending the payment
period through the subscription of
guarantees such as accounts receivable,
etc. However, be sure that the service will
be available when you need it.
Consider contributions from participant.
The person responsible for financial
control is not doing a good job.
Sometimes it is wor th bringing in
additional financial support to enable the
training to be completed. You need to
identify similar organisations that may be
interested in offering financial support
to the workshop. But if the person
responsible does not act quickly with this,
the overall programming could be
delayed and put the running of the
workshop in danger.
Be careful when selecting the right

person. Define the criteria and advise the
candidates what they are.
Look for support for the person doing

the job.
Replace the post holder as a last resort.
Contract a person who fits all the

requirements: have recruitment criteria
for the person responsible; for example
they should have experience, contacts and
knowledge of the subject.
Delegate. If the person contracted to
coordinate the workshop does not have
these abilities or does not have time for
this task, they should delegate the finance
task to a suitable person.
Prepare alternative budgets.
Ask for quotes.
Make decisions. Decide whether with

the resources you have it is best to run
the workshop or postpone it.
183 / 204
184 / 204

9.3.
Problems during the workshop
9.3.1. Logistical
and organisational problems
How to prevent it
The participants who have enrolled do

not arrive at the first session.
The start of the workshop is difficult. If
you start, you should find a way of
integrating those who arrive late. It affects
the budget because you are paying for
services you have requested and are not
being used or because additional costs
may be incurred to pay for individual
transport.
Take care with the invitation and the

enrolment and confirmation processes:
it is worth making clear how important it
is to have the entire group present from
the start.
Postpone the opening session of the

workshop to allow time for people to
arrive or start with a session that is not
so essential for everyone to attend. To
come to a decision you need to ascertain
the reasons for the late arrivals and
whether they are going to attend or not.
Provide assistance for getting to the

venue: give clear information about what
is the best way to get to the venue and
provide timetables and details of what
transport is available.
Send the agenda beforehand. If the
participants know the timetable, they will
try to arrive in time for the start of the
workshop.
Generate commitment from the
participants who have enrolled and keep
in regular contact with them; this will
definitely keep them motivated.
Keep in contact with the travel agent so
you know the position with timetables and
are then able to advise participants.
Ask for payment in advance, when
attendance at the workshop has been
confirmed; this creates a greater
commitment from the par ticipants.
More participants arrive than expected.

The implementation is more difficult
because the preparations have been
made with a certain number of people in
mind and on this basis the workshop and
the services contracts have been planned.
Also, unpleasant situations may result with
the people who arrive and are not on
the confirmed list, because they will
probably have to leave the workshop.
A larger group could affect the
participative activities in the workshop.
The work sessions take longer.
Managing time is made more difficult.
Participants can become tired or some
Take care with the how you manage the

invitation and be firm when asked to
enlarge the group (see: Organising a
training workshop, Invitation, p 42). Make
the criteria and the importance of the
proposed group size clear.
Implement the recommendations
mentioned previously in the more
requests for places than there are places
available section (see: Problems before
the workshop, p 179).
Agree to what extent a theme is to be

worked on: once the workshop training
team has been set up, define and agree
Decide at what stage in the workshop it

is no longer viable for late arrivals to join.
Be firm and objective.
Study the pros and cons of running the
workshop with a lower number of
par ticipants or for postponing it.
Remember that whether or not the
training objective is met is the fundamental basis on which to make your decision.
Adjust the programme to suit the size
of the definitive group; you can make
the most of the situation by establishing
more direct communication with the
group and running a more personal
training workshop.
Liaise as soon as possible with the venue
administration to avoid having to pay for
unused services.
Accept or reject enrolment requests:
be clear about the maximum number
of people and the profile of people that
may attend the workshop without
jeopardising the objectives of the training
or creating logistical or financial problems
(find a balance). Explain the situation in
a friendly way and firmly take the most
appropriate decision.
Repeat the workshop: consider the
possibility of running two events instead
of having one very large group.
Look for mutual solutions: Consult the
group of participants about whether to
continue to work with the theme. One

How to prevent it
themes and exercises may have to be

sacrificed. The implementation of the
whole agenda is put at risk.
in advance to what extent and to what

level to work on the themes, in line with
the context, need and profile of the
participants.
possibility is offering additional time for

example, a workgroup session after
dinner to continue the theme.
Clarify the objectives: remember the

workshop training objectives; the time
available and the relevance of the theme
when seeking a balance between what
you would like and what is really possible.
Explain the content to the participants:
from the invitation onwards, make it clear
to the participants the depth and breadth
of each theme, so that they are aware of
what they can expect at the workshop;
this way they can adapt their expectations
of the workshop objectives.
Agree rules and mechanisms of time
management so that everyone takes
responsibility for the timetable.
Make the content of all the themes
available. This way you will avoid in-depth
discussions about subjects that may be
covered in a later session.
Include didactic materials. It is worth all
the themes having didactic materials to
complement the sessions so that the
participants can study further in their own
time.
Participants and/or the guest trainers
do not keep to the agreed timetable.
The implementation of the training is
confused. The agenda is upset and time
management
becomes
ver y
complicated.
Make everyone aware of the programme

and agenda for each day, in which the
proposed times and duration of each
session are clearly stated. Also, knowing
about all the activities helps towards
managing time, so people know or have
an idea about what will follow.
Establish the rules of the game: at the
start of the workshop identify and agree
with the participants the rules of the game
for managing time that are explained to
the guest trainers at an oppor tune
moment when they arrive.
Show a good example: the members of
the training team should always show a
good example, by being punctual and
Adjust the programme and

methodology: Look for alternative tools
that allow the same objectives to be
reached in less time; or, if necessary,
suspend or omit one of the activities. For
example, instead of carrying out the work
in groups followed by the presentation
and discussion of the results in full session,
propose developing the theme and
discussion in full session only.
Objectively revise the themes that still
need to be worked on and consider the
possibility of omitting one of them and
replacing it with handouts.
Be firm. If extending a session endangers
another essential part of the workshop,
it needs to be brought to a close in a
friendly and convincing way. The training
objectives are what is most important.
Distribute a bibliography and
recommendations so participants can
obtain further information on the theme.
Enforce the rules of the game:

remember the agreed rules of the game
and if you think it is necessary, agree the
incorporation of new ones.
Find support: choose some participants
who will take responsibility for putting
the time management into practice.
Study the causes: Find out whether the
working day has overrun because of
unnecessarily discussing details that are
not relevant, or because the theme
needed it and so the learning was
expanded. Gently interrupt the
presentation to reach a group consensus,
advising everyone of the implications of
extending the theme.
185 / 204
186 / 204

How to prevent it
the established agreements seriously.
If it is appropriate to continue, try to

agree with the group what the additional
time limit is. If it is not, conclude and draw
the session to a close.
Agree warning mechanisms and signals:

in advance, propose signals for managing
time. For example, traffic lights: a green
card to indicate that there is still time, a
yellow one to indicate that time is almost
up and a red one to announce the end
of the period of activity.
The guest trainers do not deal with the

subject with the agreed focus.
If the difference is minimal or the new
focus is linked with the one agreed
originally, the situation is not critical. But
sometimes the new proposed focus may
contradict and negatively affect the
learning or compromise the rest of the
workshop.
Provide all the information that the guest

trainer needs to define, contextualise and
prepare the thematic content: information
about the par ticipants, the overall
programme, the workshop objectives,
handouts from other similar workshops,
etc.
Familiarise yourself with the
presentations: try to find out as far as
possible, the exact content of the
presentations and the didactic materials
that each guest trainer will use. Confirm
whether they are what were agreed.
Help prepare the presentations.
Propose alternatives: If it is necessary

and of interest to some to extend the
conversation on a theme, you could
suggest dedicating another time for it. In
the meantime, concentrate on continuing
with the programme.
Talk to the guest trainer: find a suitable

moment before the presentation to
speak about the importance of the
theme and to remind them of the original agreement.
Supplement the presentation: reenforce the treatment of the theme with
a contribution from one of the members
of the team or with didactic materials
relating to the theme if required.
Understand the situation: If the new
focus proposal positively contributes to
the learning, relax, support it and learn
from it.
Draw up a written contract with terms

of reference, if necessary.
Programme and carry out the evaluation
and feedback sessions for the training
team.
The guest trainers do not handle the
themes with the agreed methodology.
If the new methodology is not
contextualised to the current situation,
it could make understanding the theme
difficult. Also, if the original methodology
has been disclosed to the participants,
they may feel confused by the new one.
If, however, the changes are minimal and
enhance learning, everyone is satisfied
and grateful.
Agree and clarify the methodology:

agree in advance with the guest what
tools to use and ensure he or she
understands them. Discuss options.
Offer methodological support during the
preparation and application of the
sessions.
Draw up a written contract with terms
of reference, if you feel it is necessary.
Ensure the availability of resources
necessary for the appropriate approach.
Speak to the guest trainer: remind them

of the agreements relating to
methodology and recommend the
impor tance of maintaining the
methodological thread.
Supplement the presentation: support
the trainer with appropriate tools.
Understand the situation: if the new
methodology does in fact favour learning,
relax, support it and learn from it.

How to prevent it
Programme and carr y through the

evaluation and feedback sessions for the
training team.
The guest trainer does not arrive or
does not arrive in time for his or her
session.
The agenda cannot run as planned.There
is stress in the team; if it is very obvious
to the participants, it could generate
negative or unkind comments. Managing
time becomes difficult because of the
delay.
Agree and confirm the arrival time in

advance: ensure that the guest trainer
arrives far enough in advance of their
session. The guest trainer can use the
additional time to get to know the group
and integrate. They can also receive
contributions for the preparation of their
presentation.
Ensuring transport: make sure the guest
trainer has the correct address and has
understood how to get to the venue.
Explain any changes and difficulties they
might have.
Help with the arrival: meet them at the
airport, transport terminal or agreed place and take them to the workshop venue;
the team member who meets them can
use the journey time to get to know the
trainer better and update them on
progress at the workshop.
Arrange substitutes: this is part of plan
B. With the guest trainer, identify people
who could substitute them should they
not be able to attend. Or, identify
someone from the training team who
could substitute the guest trainer. In both
cases, decide on the programme.
Identify in advance possible session
changes in the agenda, without sacrificing
the main thread of the training content.
Stay calm: do not let panic overwhelm

the trainer or convey panic to the group.
Work as a team: establish what situation
everyone in the training team is in and
between you find the solution: whether
to continue with an activity or decide
what to do if the guest trainer does not
in fact arrive.
Use a pre-planned alternative: put plan
B into action, depending on whether
they will arrive later or not at all.
Change the order of the sessions:
change sessions or parts of them to allow
time for the replacement trainer to arrive.
Be careful to maintain a logical sequence
and the main thread for content.
Share the situation with the participants:
Advise the participants of what has
happened so the solution is agreed and
is more relevant.
Continue with what you have got: if you
already have got didactic materials or
information relating to the theme, they
can be shared with the participants and
you can decide whether the time can be
used for reading or group work.
Everything is subject to the theme and
its content.
Ask the guest trainer to send

information in advance.
One of the sessions planned cannot
take place because of other reasons
technical, logistical or environmental.
The agenda cannot be adhered to as
planned. The budget may be affected,
having a knock-on effect on resources
and last minute changes. It generates
stress that may affect the group dynamic.
It affects everyones expectations.
Realistically plan always bearing in mind,

time, distances, security, etc what would
be the implications of moving sites, the
timescale of the activity and the return
journey.
Ascertain and check the punctuality and
accuracy of facilities, for example
transport for excursions.
Stay calm.
Implement plan B.
Work with what you have available.
Consult the team. It is worth analysing
the situation and taking the decision that
most benefits the training and the
participants.
187 / 204
188 / 204

How to prevent it
Ensure that the technical equipment is

working. Have replacements available
should they be needed, for example, a
spare bulb for the projector.
Involve the participants in the decision

making. If it is necessary, replace the
session, for example by bringing forward
future sessions or further discussing the
previous one.
Be flexible when programming and

include a plan B.
The meal times overrun because the
service contract is not fulfilled.
Affects the progress of the agenda.
Depending on the group of participants,
it can create problems if meals are served
at the wrong times.
The venue does not have the facilities

expected.
Affects the programming because some
of the activities may not be able to take
place as planned.The dynamic, workshop
atmosphere and comfor t of the
participants may be affected.
As a result, additional costs could be
incurred by last minute contracting and
purchasing of services or essential
materials so the training to can take place.
Agree times in advance with the caterers

and who to contact should and there be
any changes in the timetable during the
workshop.
Make a team member responsible for
keeping in touch with those in charge of
the service. That person can also be
responsible for ensuring that the food is
available and for letting the training team
know what the situation is.
Change the agenda with the approval

of the participants; for example,
extending the session until the meal is
ready or leaving the time free for resting;
but agree a specific time to restart the
session.
Speak to those in charge of the service
to ensure the situation does not happen
again. Or agree a time to do this that
suits everyone.
Dedicate time and attention to securing

a suitable venue, that has the facilities to
suit your needs and that offers basic
services for the wellbeing of the group.
Relax.
Visit the venue in advance: choose the

venue after having visited it and checked
that it meets the basic requirements. Make
sure you have as much information as
possible about the venue; for example,
through pamphlets, photographs, maps,
websites and speaking to others who have
used the services.
Look for alternatives: substitute or

borrow technical equipment to replace
what is not provided or is not working;
hire facilities that the venue does not
have; make the coffee if it is not offered
between meals, etc.
Have alternatives: have other suitable

venues in mind, in case at the last moment
the first choice cancels. In any event, it is
worth having various venues that you can
turn to.
Draw up a contract. If you have chosen
your venue, draw up a contract that
clearly states the services offered and how
the guests will be treated.
Arrive early: try to arrive at the venue
with sufficient time to check the facilities
requested or, if they are not available,
organise and look for alternatives.
Adapt to the circumstance with good

humour and creativity.
Insist on the quality of service agreed

in the contract (if there was a contract)
or that was offered when the service was
confirmed through a verbal agreement.
Remember that the workshop
surroundings are also an important part
of effective learning.

Situacin indeseable
How to prevent it
The participants continually go in and

out of the conference room.
It interrupts the dynamic of the
workshop. Other par ticipants are
distracted. The trainer may lose
concentration during a presentation and
lose his or her train of thought.
Plan the working day effectively: plan the

working sessions to be of moderate
length and with enough breaks.
Adhere to the timetable: be sure that

the break times are adhered to.
Let people know the timetable: the general timetable and the one for each day, this
way the participants can plan other things.
Agree the rules of the game for
behaviour.
Find out the reason for the people going

out so a solution can be found.
Plan time for participants to make

telephone calls and take care of personal affairs.
Speak to the person involved.
Show a good example.

Mobile telephones interrupt the
workshop sessions.
The dynamic of the workshop is
disturbed. The noise annoys the group.
Participants attention is distracted. The
trainer may lose concentration and so
their train of thought for the
presentation.
Remind people of the agreed rules of

the game and discuss with the group how
to deal with the situation.
Be firm. If the situation requires it, speak

sensitively to the person concerned and
take a decision.
Decide on the rules of the game: From

the start of the workshop and involving
everyone, the time and place for receiving
and making telephone calls should be
decided on. As there may be exceptions,
people should agree a procedure that
does not interrupt the running of the
workshop.
Remind everyone about the rules

regarding the use of telephones.
Offer alternatives for receiving urgent

calls. For example, consider the possibility
of one of the support team receiving the
calls outside the conference room. You
could also choose some kind of a discreet
bell that does not interrupt the session.
Be firm. If the situation demands it, speak

to the person concerned with sensitivity
and take a decision.
Find out the reasons and then decide

how to manage the situation.
Implement the alternatives considered
in the initial stage of the workshop.
Show by the teams good example.
9.3.2. Interpersonal
problems
How to prevent it
Confusion regarding roles within the

training team during the sessions.
Creates uncertainty among participants
and endangers the working identity of
the team.
Define and assign roles: ensure from the

start that the roles are well distributed
and clarify the respective responsibilities
and implications of each role.
Decide on warning signs which when

used will not be obvious to the
participants.
Ensure that everyone understands what

their roles are for each session: create a
schedule that details what each person is
doing (see: The training team, The
timetable, p 86).
Agree warning mechanisms: prepare and
Feedback: make the most of daily team

sessions to provide feedback on situations
and to remind the team of their individual roles.
189 / 204
190 / 204

How to prevent it
agree with the team possible types of

signals or mechanisms to warn and
interrupt should a member of the team
take on a different role.
Plan daily feedback time and rules relating
to this (See:The training team, Performance of the training team, p 84).
Imbalance in the training team in terms

of workload, decision making and mutual support.
If most of the tasks are being left in the
hands of one person, it is possible that
they will not manage to carry them all
out and have them ready on time;
therefore the resources and necessary
facilities for running the sessions may not
be ready at the appropriate time and
place. The team dynamic itself may not
be working as it should.
The participants fail to work with a

proposed tool.
It may not be possible for the
programme to be carried out as planned
and the working day may overrun while
the suitability of the tool is discussed.The
trainer may get stressed.
Decide on roles and tasks: write and

agree a list with everyones tasks and a
schedule for the sessions; exchange that
information in such a way that you can
clarify the balance of responsibilities.
Assign the tasks according to the abilities
and skills of each member of the team.
Build a team: allow time and tools for
building and integrating the team spirit.
Ask for help so the tasks are resolved in

the time available.
Detect the friction that generates

conflict: be alert and be sure to address
them before they become a problem and
affect the work of the team or become
apparent to the participants.
Delegate tasks when it is considered

appropriate (see: Conceptual framework,
Time management, p 27).
Choose tools carefully and objectively

bearing in mind the learning process.
Rehearse how the tool should be used.
Present and explain the reason for this

particular tool to fully understand the
theme.
Choose tools that you know well and

that are directly related to the training
theme.
Remain calm. Remember that the tool

is there to aid the training and should
not be defended to the point of
exhaustion.
Explain the procedure from the start

making sure everyone has understood it.
Prepare alternatives: have several
alternative tools to hand for dealing with
a particular theme.
The participants are passive.
The participative activities are difficult
because the participants hardly react to
questions. It may sometimes seem hard
work and boring.
Speak clearly: bring up the problem in

the next team meeting or, if it is serious,
find time to meet as soon as possible
with those concerned. In this meeting,
present the problem and look for the
most objective solution possible. Call on
the professionalism of the members of
the team.
Find out about the participants interests

through the pre-workshop survey. This
means you can prepare the working days
with greater accuracy.
Prepare content and methodologies to
suit the training levels of the participants;
that way they will participate in same way
they contribute and learn.
Choose an alternative.
Change this tool for another if the group
agrees.
Adapt the content: consult the
participants about the situation and
focus on the theme which they really
need.This way the participants feel that
their desires are being taken into
account.
Change sessions; for example propose
working in small groups to increase

How to prevent it
Prepare exchange activities: choosing to

use suitable tools that encourage active
and contextualised par ticipation at
different times during the workshop.
confidence and the possibility of

participation.
Set aside time for questions and

clarifications each day of the workshop.
This way you avoid participants having
doubts that accumulate.
Agree rules of the game for participation
that are shared by everyone.
Use tools and activities that encourage

interaction. Be careful what activity you
choose.
Take care of surroundings: Be aware of
the physical spaces. For example, ensure
there is an appropriate distance between
the trainer and the participants chairs. If
there is too large a gap, it distances the
participants and they may not feel able
to put forward an opinion.
Find out the reasons for the passive
behaviour; perhaps by means of dialogue you may find a means of securing
their participation.
The group appears tired.

The overall dynamic of the workshop is
affected. The trainers may become demotivated.
Compile the programme bearing in mind

the profile of the participants, their needs
and the context in which the workshop
is implemented; (see: Conceptual
framework, Creating a training workshop,
p 34). Propose a flexible programme.
Choose a comfortable place (see:
Organising a training workshop, The
venue, p 44). Remember that choosing
good surroundings for the workshop is
crucial for the wellbeing of the group.
Continuous opposition from the group

of participants towards the training
team.
It creates bad feeling in the team, the
atmosphere can become charged and it
generally affects the progress of the
workshop; discussions could even
become aggressive.
Propose activities to liven up the group

and keep it alert.
Keep your sense of humour.
Intersperse the sessions with different
activities and tools.
Have spontaneous breaks.
Set the working day and times in line
with the context.
Programming the times in line with the

context: bear in mind the implications of
the cultural context, geographic
characteristics and the circadian rhythm
when deciding on the agenda (see: Conceptual base, Learning, p 13).
Provide adequate services; for example,

light meals so not too much energy is
required to digestion.
Consider the needs of the participants:

remember that they are the departure
point for all planning and from there
identify the appropriate trainer, who
contributes to the development and
growth of everyones skills and abilities.
Consider the reason for this behaviour:

calmly analyse whether it is an
interpersonal problem or one of a
difference of opinion. Great objectivity is
recommended and, if possible, analyse the
situation with the participants in order
to reach a satisfactory solution.
Organise extra-curricular activities

allowing sufficient time for sleeping and
rest.
191 / 204
192 / 204

How to prevent it
Provide the trainers with all the

information possible: the needs analysis,
training objectives and the professional
and personal profiles of the participants
so that their contribution can be more
focussed.
Provide time and space to resolve

differences of a personal nature, if this is
the reason for the opposition.
Ensure you know in advance what the

trainer is going to work on in the
workshop. This way you can channel feedback more effectively.
Consider an alternative.
Remain open-minded, flexible and
objective, and ensure that the whole
training team is aware that the
par ticipants can have different ideas,
preferences and opinions from theirs.This
deserves care and respect.
Low level of articulation among the

participants that inhibits mutual
learning.
This may happen in large groups.
Provide feedback to the group and look

for a change in behaviour for the benefit
of the training.
Objectively change the methodology or
the focus of the theme: according to what
is convenient for the participants.
Maintain a flexible attitude and change
plans without putting the aim of the
workshop at risk.
Be firm. Establish very clearly the
objective and context of the training and
enthusiastically propose continuing the
workshop or whatever decision is most
appropriate.
Agree rules of the game for behaviour.
Propose working in small groups.
Obtain information about the

participants prior the workshop to enable
more realistic participation to take place.
This will allow you to define the
methodology and how you will create the
working groups.
Vary the composition of the working

groups.
Define a group size that facilitates

preparation.
Prepare a methodology in line with the
profile and diversity of the participants.
Use tools that promote integration.

Promote informal space: organise informal activities if time and conditions allow,
for example a small party.
Show a good example through the
positive integration of the training team.
Choose tools that encourage integration.

Select a suitable venue that allows the
group to concentrate and to be close
together.
Break the ice from the start: for
participant introductions use creative and
dynamic tools.
Aggressive behaviour of one participant
towards another person in the
workshop.
Agree rules of the game for behaviour

and interaction between each other.
Identify possible conflicts: analyse the list
of participants and guests with the training
team to identify possible friction; for
Neutralise the aggressive words: clearly

establish what the exact reason for the
opinion is. If this does not relate to the
subject but to another person, that's the
end of the conversation; take it no further.

How to prevent it
Negatively affects the dynamic of the

training. Attention is channelled into
finding a solution to problems that may
have origins outside of the workshop;
for example, pre-existing personal or
professional conflict. It affects the
objectivity of the workshop.
example, that might arise because of the

organisations they represent.
Remain calm: do not respond to the

aggressor with the same level of
aggression or express your personal
opinions.The problem is not about you.
Watch the participants body language;

this may give you the opportunity to
detect potential conflict between people.
Make the most of contact prior to the
workshop.
Avoid judging ideologies, values, beliefs
and social classes. Prejudice can affect
personalities and generate aggressive
behaviour.
Be an example. If the trainer treats
everyone equally and in a friendly way,
the participants may be able to control
aggression towards colleagues and reduce their desire to use the workshop as a
space for resolving conflicts.
Talk to the parties involved to establish

what the situation is, remind them of the
wellbeing of the workshop and suggest
a time to speak, for example, they could
have lunch together. If you think it might
help, offer assistance, but do not try to
resolve a conflict that you are not fully
aware of.
Look for assistance within the group
because the situation may compromise
learning. Furthermore, pressure from the
group may be more effective and decisive
than your suggestions or the group may
reinforce them.
Feedback to the aggressor, letting them
know the implications their activity is
having on the workshop and on their
own learning.
Type of participant
How to be prepared for this type

of behaviour
What to do when faced with

this type of behaviour
1) The opposer:
Advanced evaluation: Find out what the

par ticipants interests and level of
knowledge are in relation to the theme
(see: Organising a training workshop,
Template of a preliminary survey, p 64).
Allow the person to say what he or she

needs to say and pay attention; this makes
the person feel that the group is listening,
which will calm the person down.
This is a participant who continually

questions the trainers or other
participants.They have doubts about the
tools used and the results; they
persistently interrupt and put forward
other proposals.
You can make the most of this situation
because opposition can help to create a
better understanding and force changes.
The problem is that people may feel they
are in an irrational disagreement that
could result in personal aggression.
Send the agenda with the invitation so

that the participant knows what the
workshop is about (see: Organising a
training wor kshop, Example of a
workshop agenda, p 55).
Find out about peoples expectations
and fears from the beginning of the
workshop so you can bear them in mind
as the training progresses (see:
Implementation the workshop, p 73).
Favour the group as a whole. Do not

show that you take any particular side in
a discussion.
Avoid and forbid hurtful comments.
Remember that it is the ideas that are
opposed not the people.
Reply to their questions in the most
objective way possible; try to clarify any
doubts using your normal tone of voice.
Show that you are prepared to take
proposals seriously. However, do not fall
in the trap of being directly contradictory;
this will lead to an unnecessary upset or
193 / 204
194 / 204

Type of participant

of behaviour

Agree the rules of the game regarding

behaviour from the beginning (See:
Implementing the workshop, The
workshop induction, p 71).
discussion at a personal level between

you and the person involved.
Clearly explain the content of the

workshop and its relation to the needs
Clearly justify the tools and make sure
that the procedures for the various
activities and exercises are clear and
understandable.
Treat participants the same, value each
participant contribution. If you suspect
that there is conflict between two people,
meet with them before the workshop
session and seek to reach an agreement
for the good of the workshop. Try to get
both parties to agree a proposal together.
Integrate and diversify the working
groups: ensure that participants with
different types of behaviour mix.
Consider this persons contributions

but without preference. On the one
hand, these contributions may be fruitful
to develop the theme; but on the other,
if they become negative and even of a
destructive nature, they can hold up and
interrupt the process and as a result,
cause the other participants to withdraw
from participating.
Share the situation with the group; invite the other participants to respond
to the questions put forward by the
opposer and to make suggestions about
how to manage the situation that caused
that person to behave in this way.
Use activities that promote group
integration from the beginning of the
workshop.
Remember the rules of the game.
Clearly explain the workshop content,
its relation to the needs of the
participants and highlight the positive
results that might be achieved in terms
of the objectives.
groups: try to change the members of
the working groups.
Enter into dialogue with the opposer.
2) The know-it-all:
This is a participant who wants to show
his abilities to the group and to the
trainers. Sometimes they are people who
think they are superior to everyone else,
they are dominant and appear arrogant;
they isolate themselves from the rest of
the group and are not receptive to
contributions they appear egocentric.
They want to use the themes to benefit
their own interests without thinking
about the needs of the group.
Agree rules of the game; fix a time for

individual contributions their focus or
direction should get straight to the point.
Also, agree the procedure for
contributions and mechanisms to control
time.
Avoid favouring particular participants.
Show similar interest in all participants in
the group.
Value the contributions of all: recognise
and incorporate the different ideas
Integrate the person into the group

process and let them present. If possible,
find a way of making good use of their
qualities for the benefit of the workshop
objectives.
Look for assistance from the group to
stop these individual episodes and
speeches.
Remember the agreed rules of the
game; for example a time limit of no
more than three minutes for each

Type of participant

of behaviour

in the training sessions, for example when

you summarise.
contribution (see: Implementation of the

workshop;The workshop induction, p 71),
this way you can avoid unproductive
discussions.

groups.
Watch participants body language
because this particular person may not
regulate his or her gestures and facial
expressions which tell you that you are
not telling them anything new, mainly
because that person already knows it all.
This participant is only interested in his

or her own participation and insists on
imposing their contributions and
opinions, creating in other participants a
sense of boredom or aggression towards
that person or conformism or passivism,
which results in equality and creativity
being lost.With the attitude of a knowit-all there is the possibility the content
of their responses is lost even though it
might be interesting.
Remain calm but look for a balance

between the benefits of a speech and
managing time.
Ensure you do not get involved in an
exclusive conversation with this
participant. You can turn around a
persons comment to allow another
person to speak. For example:what you
have said is very important and it is worth
looking into it further, but what does
Vincent think? or just a moment,Adam;
Eve were you going to say something?
Rigidly ask for each participants opinion
in turn; or give preference to the opinion
of the more timid members of that group
and try to visualise all these ideas.
Everyone likes to have their idea
recognised; this will also avoid repetition.
Use body language; maintain eye contact
with the person and, through your
gestures, help them to bring their speech
to a close.
Speak to the person concerned alone
and calmly to discuss the difficulties that
their behaviour is causing the participative
dynamic, time management and reactions
the other participants are having.
3. The indifferent participant:

This participant shows apathy towards
the workshop content and adopts a
passive attitude; for example, they read
the newspaper or interrupt the work
sessions with frequent exits from the
room, late arrivals or talking to their
neighbour.
Advance evaluation: know what interests

the participant about the theme and what
their level of knowledge of the subject is
(see: Organising a training workshop,
Template of a preliminary survey, p 64).
Be aware of expectations and fears: you
can find out such information at the start
of the workshop (see: Implementing the
workshop, p 73) and have them to hand
Agree rules of the game relating to active participation.
Draw them into the workshop; show

interest in their experience, preferences
and opinions and make them feel they
are important members of the group.
Involve them in the themes and, when
they have results, recognise their
contribution.
Ask for their opinion regarding subjects
you know they can contribute to.
Ask questions that everyone should be
able to respond to.
195 / 204
196 / 204

Type of participant

of behaviour

Use activities that promote integration

from the introduction stage of the
workshop.
Remind people of the objectives and

the rules previously agreed.
Treat all the participants equally. Try to

place equal value on contributions
participants make.
Avoid favouritism. It will make everyone
feel they have the same role.
Explain the content of the workshop
clearly and concisely and its relation to
the needs of the participants.
Make sure the presentations are being
understood.
groups; ensure that the participants are
mixed between the different groups.
4) The timid participant:

These participants only speak if someone
addresses them and often speak very
softly.This is often because they are afraid
of being thought badly of, knowing less
than others or being inferior to others.
Propose working groups with small

numbers of participants in which they
can take greater participation.
From the start of the workshop, use the
activities that promote integration which
break the ice and treat all par ticipants
equally.
Know some of the qualities and
characteristics of the participants. This
will avoid proposing activities that are
undesirable and inhibit participation.
Find out about the personal
characteristics of the participants from
the star t of the wor kshop. If the
introduction session includes personal
questions, it is possible at this point to
identify the timid people and you can
adjust the proposed wor k and
development of the workshop.
Treat everyone equally from the start of
the workshop, so they feel at ease and
may give their opinions.
Speak; speak to the indifferent

participant when he or she becomes too
distracted. Find a time and space to speak
to the person alone and find out the
reasons for this behaviour. With this
information the team may be able to
find a solution.
Provide some alternatives; as a last
resort, make the person feel free to decide whether to remain at or leave the
workshop. Sometimes, to motivate the
dynamic of the rest of the group, it is
better that the participant leaves with
workshop because his or her behaviour
devalues the process and de-motivates
the others from participating. Often
these people change when they are given
the choice between leaving and staying
and they realise they are not forced to
attend; of course, you need to make this
a genuine suggestion and not give the
impression that the individual has no
alternative but to leave the workshop.
Integrate these people into the dynamic
of the workshop by forming suitable
working groups so that these people
have the opportunity to express their
ideas. Often, timid people have
interesting ideas and contributions for
the workshop.
Show an interest in their experiences
and opinions. Ask them questions, but
do not overwhelm them with complex
and large sentences.
Incorporate their contributions.You can
instigate a change in the way the person
participates if you bear in mind the
contributions they may have made
previously in the workshop.
Use tools that promote the participation
of all. This can give the timid person a
little nudge in the right direction.
Use understandable terminology and
ensure that you are being understood.

Type of participant

of behaviour

5) The joker or comedian:
Be an example of how to behave. A

spontaneous and authentic smile can gain
the sympathy of the participants, but this
should happen at appropriate times.
Avoid having a number of jokers in the

same group.
This is a person who is accepted by the

rest of the group and on the whole
everyone likes.This kind of person makes
jokes, but almost always respects
standards in the group and the integrity
of the other participants.
Occasionally, a joke, wise crack or
spontaneous and ingenious remark that
is not offensive or hurtful adds to the
workshop dynamic; everything, though,
has its limits.
Although a person with this behaviour
does not necessarily interrupt the
participative dynamic with jokes or
comments, if there are a number of
people like this there could be a
proliferation of jokes between them,
which could develop into an
uncontrollable situation.
Avoid times and commentaries in which

the joker might go too far.
Cultivate this behaviour with dignity: take
the opportunity to break the ice in some
situations, ask them to participate on
different daily committees.
Allow a limited amount of time for jokes,
because what may be amusing for some
people, for other s may be simply
annoying.
Treat everyone equally. Sometimes, these
people want to be taken more notice of
and think that through their jokes they
can achieve this.
Diversify the composition of working

groups because sometimes, jokers find
people in a certain group who encourage
their tiresome jokes. It is better to
separate them.
Talk: talk to these people and ask them
to moderate their behaviour; it is probable that they will respond positively to
your suggestions.
Show by example and caution.
Use this behaviour to motivate and keep
the group in good humour. To achieve
this, you need to find the necessary balance between joking and being serious,
so that the situation does not get out of
control.
Be firm. If you think it necessary, avoid
encouraging jokes; and if they do happen,
interrupt them before they do any harm
to other people or before they jeopardise
the training.
Draw them into the workshop, give
them responsibilities.This will make them
feel responsible for the implementation
of the workshop.
6) The clown:
This is a person who wants to be liked
by the rest of the group. To a certain
extent this is a kind and likeable person
who may often hide insecurity and
complexes behind the faade of their
behaviour. But, unlike the comedian, the
clown makes continuous jokes that can
become excessive or turn into mockery
that may attack and offend other
participants feelings; for example, about
cultural or religious issues.
Try to identify this type of behaviour

from the beginning of the workshop in
order to prepare the mechanisms to help
deal with this it.
Be an example of serious behaviour;
allow space for jokes at appropriates times.
Avoid time and comments in which this
kind of participant can go too far with
their behaviour and may ridicule a
member of the training team or another
participant.
Be cautious: calmly analyse the situation.

As long as the jokes are within an
acceptable margin, and do not interrupt
or hamper the process of the workshop,
you do not need to take any action.
Put a stop to this persons behaviour
intervene so that the victims of the jokes
do not alter their participation.
Speak: Talk to this person about their
behaviour, because often they themselves
do not realise that they have gone too
far with their comments.
197 / 204
198 / 204

Type of participant

of behaviour

Agree the rules of the game relating to

behaviour and the time for jokes and witty
comments.
Remember the rules of the game

whenever it is appropriate.
Treat everyone equally. Sometimes these

people want to be noticed and try to
achieve this by any means; so make use
of their ability to make people laugh or
joke about others.
9.3.2. Financial
problems
How to prevent it
There are not sufficient resources to run

some of the workshop activities.
If the activity was planned at preparation
stage, the programme may change and
expectations may exist that cannot be
met.
Spend strictly according to what is

budgeted for and planned.
Keep control of expenditure: find ways

of avoiding abuse of funds. For example,
hand out tokens or tickets so participants
do not over-consume.
Identify alternatives or a plan B that

you can use in case of emergency.
Budget well: When creating the budget
include unplanned expenses that may be
used for materials, unexpected
participants and medical attention for a
sick participant, etc.
Define the expenses that the workshop
will cover; clarify in the invitation and
inauguration of the event what costs will
be covered by the organisation. This
should also be made clear to the
administration of the venue.
Look for support from the participants;

let them know about the situation so
that they can also help find possible
solutions.
Make savings: avoid having expensive
activities, find alternatives for a similar
service but at a lower cost. Use plan B.
Arrange credit: discuss with the hotel
or other service provider the possibility
of credit.This is only recommended when
the funds are guaranteed and will cover
the cost at a late date.

9.4.
Problems after the workshop
9.4.1. Logistical
and/or organisational problems
How to prevent it
Damaged property.
It leaves a bad impression with the
administration at the venue and may
incur additional expenditure to pay for
the damage. An undesirable situation.
Equipment should only be used by

members of the team who have the skills
to use it.
Repair the damage.
Explain clearly to everyone how to use

equipment and provide any
recommendations relating to the venue
with the help of member of the venue staff.
Insist that everyone complies with the
specifications and appropriate use of facilities.
Decide whether anyone should

contribute towards the cost of repair.
Identify the facts of the case; find out
whether the damage came about
because of the workshop or some other
way, for example, through wear and tear
of the equipment.
Inform the insurance company, if you
have one.
Take out insurance.

Review the condition of equipment and
facilities when they are handed over to you.
The undertakings made for the followup are not carried through.
It jeopardises the training process. The
participants and organisations may lose
faith in the organisers. There is no way
of knowing the post-workshop
applications, effects and impact of the
training. It also gives the feeling that they
just attended another workshop, a
workshop just like any other.
Make the commitment binding; have the

commitments written down, made public
and dated.
Build a programme with the participants
for continuity making clear the: why? what
for? how? when? with whom and for
whom? where? and what do I need? and
other questions that might be need
resolving. It is worth allowing time at the
end of the workshop for this exercise.
Stay in contact; find out about and

motivate the fulfilment of the
commitments and show the
consequences of not carrying them out
in the final consolidation of the effects of
the training (see:The training workshop,
Designing the follow-up, p 39).
Using alternative mechanisms for not
losing contact. Nowadays, the internet
makes these processes easier.
Create measurable indicators for

everyone.
9.4.2. Financial
problems
How to prevent it
Participants do not pay their personal

accounts.
The image of the organisers is
compromised. Distrust which may
become a barrier to securing services in
the future.
Make it clear what expenses are met by

the workshop: advise in the invitation and
in the other communications which costs
are covered by the organisation of the
workshop and which costs the participant
is responsible for. Remind people of this
Inform and negotiate with the

participant to find a solution.
Ask the administration of the venue not

to give credit for personal expenses.
Monitor personal expenses so you can
act in time.
Send the bill to the organisation the

participant belongs to, if you do not
reach an agreement with that person.
Leave the issue to be settled between
the venue administration and the
person who incurred the expenditure,
because you had made things clear from
the beginning.
199 / 204
200 / 204

How to prevent it
One of the organising sponsors does

not fulfil their payment commitment.
The coordinator has problems with the
administration, because that is the
contact they have.The coordinator may
have difficulties in future.
Ensure effective commitments between

representatives of the organisations and
the venue administration. Remember
your role is that of an intermediary.
Help with the fulfilment of the

commitment. As you have been a witness
that the services have been received you
can firmly request that the agreement is
respected.
Avoid committing yourself if you are not

sure about how serious the parties might
be.
Be sure to watch expenditure, so that
the total spend does not exceed the
budget (see: Financial problems during the
workshop, p 98).
Distance yourself from the problem and

leave the two parties concerned to
resolve the situation.
ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Bibliography

Dear trainer:
ne of the strengths as a trainer is being able to
There are no miraculous recipes or unique solutions
stay calm; use your experience and skills to avoid
and mechanisms to resolve the different problems that
and solve difficulties that may arise before, during
may arise. From your own unique style, the experience
and after the workshop. Good preparation and
you accumulate will help you to anticipate many of
organisation help to anticipate potential problems,
the problems or discover them in time and find
which lead to successful implementation; but each step
solutions. Also, remember that you are not alone;
requires care.
whenever it is necessary, turn to your training team

and to the participant group, who will provide you
Tensions and stress can be avoided if, from the point
with recommendations and suggestion for solving the
of the invitation, the workshop objectives are realistic
problems.
and clearly relate to the needs of the participants; also,

if, as the training progresses, a positive and open
Plan B can be an alternative for avoiding or alleviating
atmosphere is created in which everyone feels free to
difficulties that may arise throughout the course of the
participate and believes their contributions are valued
training.
and are contributing to the collective learning process.

This way, each participant is affirmed as part of the
Get on good terms with the participants through
process.
spontaneity and making the most of your sense of

humour which can accompany your enjoyable and
Keep in mind, however, that conflicts are a part of
interesting presentation; these can help you keep some
normal life. It is normal, therefore, that they arise in
control over the difficult participants and gain the
groups; whatever the situation, you should be aware
support of the rest of the group.
of the particular group dynamic and everyones

attitudes; you should try to interpret peoples reactions
Each workshop that you embark upon will be a new
to verbal and non-verbal messages make sure you
experience for you, which will add to the quantity and
get to know all the participants in the group well and
quality of your own tools for resolving difficult
in each situation, try to identify the appropriate course
circumstances. But remember, prevention is better than
of action. The most important thing is that you do not
cure. Every workshop achieves more if you keep your
take problems personally. Remember it is the ideas
sense of humour; good humour and shared smiles
and not the people that are competing: at all costs,
also favour learning and, in turn, the achievement of
avoid a conflict becoming big.
the objectives.
201 / 204
202 / 204

Bibliography
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ARBEITSKREIS PDAGOGIK; FREIRE, Paulo (Ed).

Mit Phantasie und Spass. Praktische Anregungen
fr eine motivierende politische Bildungsarbeit.
Mnchen 1991.
ACOSTA VERA, Jos Mara. Uso eficaz del tiempo.
Cmo alcanzar el xito sin estrs. Barcelona, Gestin 2000, 1999.
AGUILAR IDEZ, Mara Jos. Cmo animar un
grupo: Tcnicas grupales. Madrid, Editorial CCS,
2000.
ASOCIACIN DE MUNICIPALIDADES ECUATORIANAS Y SOCIEDAD ALEMANA DE COOPERACIN TCNICA. Gua Prctica para Docentes
Facilitadores. Quito, 1996.
BALLSTAEDT, Steffen-Peter. Lerntexte und
Teilnehmerunterlagen. Weinheim/Basel, Beltz,
1994, 2 edicin.
BIRKENBIHL, Michael. Formacin de formadores
Train the trainers: Manual prctico para educadores, profesores y directores de formacin de
personal en las empresas. Madrid, Editorial
Parainfo, 1999. 7 edicin.
BNING, Uwe: Moderieren mit System:
Besprechungen effizient steuern. Wiesbaden,
Gabler Verlag, 1991.
CANDELO R., Carmen. y URIBE P., Mnica. Propuesta metodolgica para la identificacin y elaboracin de proyectos en comunidades indgenas
de la Amazonia. Bogot, Tratado de Cooperacin
Amaznica-Unin Europea, 1997.
9.
CIRIGLIANO, Gustavo F.J. y VILLAVERDE, Anbal.

Dinmicas de Grupos y Educacin. Fundamentos y Tcnicas. Buenos Aires, Editorial Lumen y
Humanitas, 1997.
10. DAUSCHER, Ulrich. Moderationsmethode und

Zukunftswerkstatt. Neuwied/Kriftel/Berln,
Luchterhand, 1998. 2 edicin
11. DAVIDSON, Jeff; SNCHEZ LPEZ, Mara Amparo (translator). La gestin del tiempo. Prentice
Hall (Pearson Educacin, S.A.), Madrid, 2000.
12. DELGADO, Fidel; DEL CAMPO, Patxi. Sacando
jugo al juego. Gua para el autodescubrimiento
ms divertido. Barcelona, 1997, 2 Edicin.
13. DSE/ACT. MOVE- Moderation and Visualization
for Participatory Group Event. Unverfftl.
Manuskript, Berln. 1999
14. EDELMANN, Walter. Lernpsychologie. Weinheim,
Verlagsgruppe Beltz, 2000, 7 Edicin.
15. FUENTES, Patricio; AYALA, Amalia; GALN, Jos
I.; MARTNEZ, Pilar. Tcnicas de trabajo en grupo. Una alternativa en educacin. Madrid, Ediciones Pirmide, 2000.
16. GAN, Federico; ALONSO, Beatriz; DE FRANCISCO, Eva; PUYOL, Santiago. Manual de Tcnicas e
Instrumentos de Formacin en la Empresa. Barcelona, Ediciones Apostrof, 1995.
17. GARCA MAESTRO, Gregorio. Claves del xito.
Hablar en pblico. Editorial Libsa, Madrid, 2000.
18. GEISSLER, Karlheinz A. Anfangssituationen. Was
man tun und was man lassen sollte. Weinheim/
Basel, Beltz, 1997, 7 edicin.1
T N: This reference book is included on the previous reference on the original. It was separated on the translation due to be a different quotation.

19. GRIESHABER, Christine. Step by Step. Group

Development: A Trainers Handbook. Deutsche
Stiftung fr Internationale Entwicklung,
Zentralstelle fr Ernhrung und Landwirtschaft,
Feldafing, 1994.
20. HINDLE, Tim. La Administracin del tiempo. Barcelona, Editorial Grijalbo, Mondadori, 1998.
21. HOSTIE, Raymond. Tcnicas de Dinmica de Grupo. Curso de sensibilizacin en las relaciones humanas. Madrid, Publicaciones ICCE, Educacin 96.
22. HUNTER, Dale; BAILEY, Anne; TAYLOR, Bill. The
Art of Facilitation. How to create Group Synergy.
Tucson, Fisher Books, 1995.
23. IFOK (Institut fr Organisationskommunikation).
Moderationsschulung-Grundlagen der
Moderation. Bensheim, 2000.
24. JAY, Ros; MNDEZ, Gloria (translator). Reuniones de trabajo. Prentice Hall (Pearson Educacin
S.A.), Madrid, 2000.
25. JAY, Ros; MNDEZ, Gloria (translator). Trabajo
atrasado. Prentice Hall (Pearson Educacin S.A.),
Madrid, 2000.
26. JOKISCH, Wolfram. Steiner Spielekartei: Elemente
zur Entfaltung von Kreativitt, Spiel und
schpferischer Arbeit in Gruppen. Mnster, 1994.
27. JUSTICE, Tom; JAMIESON, David W. The
Facilitators Fieldbook: step by step procedures,
checklists and guidelines, samples and templates.
New York, American Management Association,
1999.
28. KNOLL, Jrg. Kleingruppenmethoden: Effektive
Gruppenarbeit in Kursen, Seminaren, Trainings
und Tagungen. Weinheim/Basel, Beltz, 1993.
29. KNOLL, Jrg. Kurs-und Seminarmethoden. Ein

Trainingsbuch zur Gestaltung von Kursen und
Seminaren, Arbeits-und Gesprchskreisen.
Weinheim/Basel, Beltz, 1993, 5 edicin.
30. KUGEMANN, Walter F. Lerntechniken fr
Erwachsene. Reinbeck, Rowohlt Taschenbuch
Verlag, 1978.
31. LIPP, Ulrich; WILL, Hermann. Das grofse WorkshopBuch. Konzeption, Inszenierung und Moderation
von Clausuren, Besprechungen und Seminaren.
Weinheim/Basel, Beltz, 1996.
32. MALDONADO WILLMAN, Hctor. Manual de comunicacin oral. Mxico, Addison Wesley
Longmann, 1988.
33. MANCHESTER OPEN LEARNING. Cmo hacer
presentaciones eficaces. Ediciones Gestin 2000
S.A., Barcelona, 2 edicin, 1997.
34. NIO ROJOS, Vctor Miguel. Los procesos de la
comunicacin y del lenguaje. Bogot,
Ecoediciones, 2000.
35. PEARSON, Barrie. Cmo administrar racionalmente el tiempo para logro del xito personal. Bogot, ediciones Macchi, 1993.
36. PROEQUIDAD. Herramientas para construir
equidad entre mujeres y hombres. Manual de capacitacin. Bogot, Proyecto Proequidad DNP/
gtz, 1995.
37. SCHLICKSUPP, Helmut. Innovation, Kreativitt
und Ideenfindung. Wrzburg, Vogel, 1998. 5
edicin.
38. SCHMIEL, Martn; SOMMER, Karl-Heinz.
Lernfrderung Erwachsener. Heidelberg, Sauer
Verlag, 1991.
203 / 204
204 / 204

39. SCHRDER, Peter. Werkstatt Moderationstraining.

Arbeitspapiere/handouts 2000.
Training Trainees Photo Reports

1.
DSE/ECOFONDO. Taller de Capacitacin a

Capacitadores. Bogot, 10-14 de junio de 1999
(SE 510-125-99ex).
2.
DSE/ECOFONDO/MMA. Taller de Capacitacin

a Capacitadores, Bogot, 14-23 de febrero de
2000(SE 510-122-00).
40. SCHULZ VON THUN, Friedemann. Miteinander

reden. Strungen und Klrungen. Reinbeck,
Rowohlt Taschenbuch Verlag, 1981.
41. SEIWERT, Lothar J. Mehr ZEIT fr das Wesentliche.
Besseres Zeitmanagement mit der SEIWERT
Methode. Mnchen y Landsberg/Lech, mvg-Verlag,
1995.
42. ULLRICH, Gabriele; KRAPPITZ, Uwe; SALAS, Mara A. Enfoque participativo de trabajo en grupos.
Introduccin y ejemplos para la aplicacin.
Feldafing, DSE/ Centro de Fomento de la Alimentacin y la Agricultura, 1997, 2 edicin.
43. UNICEF BANGLADESH. VIPP-Visualization in
Participatory Programmes. A manual for
facilitators and trainers involved in participatory
group events. Bangladesh, UNICEF Bangladesh,
1993.
44. VESTER, Frederic. Denken, Lernen, Vergessen.
Wasgeht in unserem Kopf vor, wie lernt das Gehirn,
und wann lfst es uns im Stich. Mnchen,
Deutscher Taschenbuch Verlag, 1978.
45. WEIDENMANN, Bernd. Lernen mit Bildmedien.
Psychologische und didaktische Grundlagen.
Weinheim/Basel, Beltz, 1994, 2 edicin
46. WORKMAN, Liz. Training of Trainers: Workshop
Manual. Washington, WWF, 1992, unpublished.
47. WWF. Capacitacin de Capacitadores. 1994

Organising and Running Workshops

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Organising and Running Workshops

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Organising and Running Workshops

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Background / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

A Practical Guide for Trainers

ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

Original Spanish Version Written by

CALI COLOMBIA 2003

ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

Colombia / Diego M. Garcs

Colombia / Carmen Candelo,

Colombia / Andrs Trujillo,

Colombia / Faizuly Cern,

Colombia / Luis Fernando Gmez.

Contents / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

2.2. What is the focus?

2.3. Who is it aimed at?

2.4. How do I use this manual?

2.5. Where does the focus come from?

2.6. What does it contain?

3.4. Managing Time

4. The training workshop

4.2. Creating the training workshop

5. Organising a training workshop

5.2. Selecting and contracting the training team

5.3. Setting the workshop dates

5.4. Inviting the participants

5.6. The workshop venue

ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS / Contents

5.8. The day before the workshop

5.9. Advice on organisation

to help with organisation

Example of a work plan for organising a workshop

Format of workshop venue requirements list

Format of materials list required for running a visual

Example of a workshop agenda

Template of invitation or announcement

Example of invitation or announcement

Template of a preliminary survey

Example of preliminary survey

6. Implementing the workshop

6.2. The running order of the days

6.3. The workshop closing session

6.4. Workshop handouts

6.5. The photographic record

6.6. Recommendations for the implementation of the workshop

7. The training team

7.2. Roles within a training team

7.3. Composition of the team

7.4. Performance of the training team

7.5. The workshop timetable

7.6. The coordinator

7.7. The moderator

7.8. The trainer

7.9. The support people

8. The Tool box

8.2. Tools for visualisation

Contents / ORGANISING AND RUNNING WORKSHOPS

Field trip or site visit

Tools for training

The ball of string

Making up pairs and organising groups

The animal chorus